JP6809740B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention has a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, it is possible to start variable display in each of the variable display columns. The present invention relates to a game machine capable of imparting a game value according to a combination of symbols when the variable display row of the above is stopped.

As an example of a game machine, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are provided, and a winning combination lottery is performed by operating a start switch and the reels are started to rotate, and the result of the winning combination lottery and the operation mode of the stop switch ( There is a slot machine that can stop the rotation of reels based on the push order, operation timing, etc., and give benefits according to the combination of symbols on the winning line when all reels stop. In addition, as an advantageous state for the player, a bonus that improves the winning probability of a predetermined role (for example, a small role or a replay), RT (Replay Time), and the result of the role lottery result in winning a plurality of roles. There is also a slot machine provided with an AT (Assist Time) that notifies operation information that is advantageous to the player in order to win a winning combination with a larger privilege. In addition, a pachinko gaming machine that launches a pachinko ball into the game area and wins a prize at the start winning opening provided in the game area to variably display a plurality of types of symbols and then stops the pachinko game machine to display the symbol combination. Are known.

In such a game machine, there are bonuses such as BB and RB and those controlled by AT as a state more advantageous than usual for the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-165936

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement at the end of the advantageous state .

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide an improved game machine at the end of an advantageous state .

A gaming machine according to a certain aspect of the present invention is an advantageous state control means capable of controlling a gaming machine capable of playing a game to an advantageous state advantageous to the player up to a limiter value reaching a predetermined limiter value. , A specific image display means for displaying a specific image capable of reaching the limiter value and specifying that the advantageous state ends when a specific condition is satisfied according to the progress of the game in the advantageous state. The limiter value includes a first limiter value based on the game value given in the advantageous state and a second limiter value based on the number of games digested in the advantageous state, and the specific condition is given. The specific image includes the first specific condition that is satisfied based on the game value and the second specific condition that is satisfied based on the number of digested games, and the specific image is obtained when the first specific condition is satisfied and when the first specific condition is satisfied. 2 Unlike when the specific condition is satisfied, the gaming machine further displays a caution image that warns the player to pay attention to excessive gaming when the advantageous state is terminated, and reaches the limiter value. When finished, the caution image is displayed at a timing different from the timing at which the specific image is displayed.
The gaming machine may have the following configurations.
As another configuration, a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols are provided, and by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, variable display in each of the variable display columns can be started. In a game machine capable of assigning a game value according to a combination of symbols when all the variable display columns are stopped, the game operation detecting means for detecting a plurality of types of game operations and the game operation detecting means for detecting the game. A game control means that controls the progress of the game according to the performed operation for the game, an operation detection means for the effect that detects the operation for the effect, and a promotion effect that encourages the player to perform the operation for the effect on the operation detection means for the effect. The plurality of types of game operations include a start operation for starting variable display in each of the plurality of variable display columns, and the plurality of variable display operations, which are provided with effect control means for controlling execution of a plurality of types of effects including. The effect control means includes the final stop operation of stopping the variable display in the one variable display column in a state where only one variable display column of the display columns is variably displayed, and the effect control means triggers the detection of the start operation. The promotion effect can be started in at least one of the first period and the second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation, and at least one of the first period and the second period. The promotion effect started in one of the periods can be continuously executed even after the end of the period until the effect operation is detected, and the effect control means is accompanied by the promotion effect. By detecting the effect for effect, a identifiable effect that can specify whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given and an unspecified effect that cannot specify whether or not the privilege is given. The rate at which the identifiable effect is executed by the operation-enabled effect executing means including the operation-enabled effect executing means for executing any of the plurality of types of effects including and is higher than that in the first period. It is set to be higher in the second period, and the rate at which the unspecified effect is executed by the operation-responsive effect executing means is higher than in the second period. It is set to be higher when it is a period.

According to this configuration, the promotion effect can be started in at least one of the first period triggered by the detection of the start operation and the second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation. In addition, the unspecified effect is likely to be executed in the first period, and the identifiable effect is easily executed in the second period after the first period in the flow of the game. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation that the privilege is given in the first period and to maintain the expectation that the privilege is given until the second period, so that the interest of the game can be improved. it can. In addition, since it is easier to execute the identifiable effect in the second period, it is easier to specify whether or not the privilege is granted, and it is possible to give a sharp impression to whether or not the privilege is granted. it can. Further, once the promotion effect is started, the effect operation can be performed at the player's pace. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences that may cause the player to panic.

A gaming machine according to a certain aspect of the present invention has a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, the variable display in each of the variable display columns In a game machine capable of giving a game value according to a combination of symbols when all the variable display columns are stopped, a game operation detection means for detecting a plurality of types of game operations and the game The game control means that controls the progress of the game according to the game operation detected by the operation detection means, the effect operation detection means that detects the effect operation, and the effect operation to the effect operation detection means. It is provided with an effect control means for controlling the execution of a plurality of types of effects including a promotion effect for urging a person, and the plurality of types of game operations include a start operation for starting a variable display in each of the plurality of variable display columns. The effect control means includes the final stop operation of stopping the variable display in the one variable display column in a state where only one variable display column of the plurality of variable display columns is variably displayed. The promotion effect can be started in at least one of the first period triggered by the detection of the operation and the second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation, and the promotion effect can be started in the first period and the second period. The promotion effect started in at least one of the periods can be continuously executed even after the end of the period until the effect operation is detected, and the promotion effect is the effect. The first pattern of executing an unspecified effect in which it is not possible to specify whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given by detecting the operation for the effect, and the player by detecting the operation for the effect. The rate at which the promotion effect by the first pattern is started in the first period includes the second pattern of executing the identifiable effect that can specify whether or not the privilege that is advantageous to the user is given. The promotion effect by the pattern is set to be higher than the ratio started in the second period.

According to this configuration, the promotion effect can be started in at least one of the first period triggered by the detection of the start operation and the second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation. Further, the rate at which the promotion effect by the first pattern is started in the first period is higher than the rate at which the promotion effect by the second pattern is started in the second period. For this reason, it is possible to provide many opportunities to raise expectations by starting the promotion effect by the first pattern in the first period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, once the promotion effect is started, the effect operation can be performed at the player's pace. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences that may cause the player to panic.

A gaming machine according to a certain aspect of the present invention has a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, the variable display in each of the variable display columns In a game machine capable of giving a game value according to a combination of symbols when all the variable display columns are stopped, a game operation detection means for detecting a plurality of types of game operations and the game The game control means that controls the progress of the game according to the game operation detected by the operation detection means, the effect operation detection means that detects the effect operation, and the effect operation to the effect operation detection means. It is provided with an effect control means for controlling the execution of a plurality of types of effects including a promotion effect for urging a person, and the plurality of types of game operations include a start operation for starting a variable display in each of the plurality of variable display columns. The effect control means includes the final stop operation of stopping the variable display in the one variable display column in a state where only one variable display column of the plurality of variable display columns is variably displayed. The promotion effect can be started in at least one of the first period triggered by the detection of the operation and the second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation, and the promotion effect can be started in the first period and the second period. The promotion effect started in at least one of the periods can be continuously executed even after the end of the period until the effect operation is detected, and the effect control means is the effect control means. The promotion effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of modes including a predetermined mode and a special mode, and the promotion effect in the special mode is more in the second period than in the first period. It starts at a high rate, and the promotion effect in the predetermined mode starts at a higher rate in the first period than in the second period.

According to this configuration, the promotion effect can be started in at least one of the first period triggered by the detection of the start operation and the second period triggered by the detection of the final stop operation. In addition, it is possible to raise the expectation that the promotion effect is executed in a special mode in the second period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, once the promotion effect is started, the effect operation can be performed at the player's pace. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences that may cause the player to panic.

Preferably, an image display unit capable of displaying an image in a display area by superimposing a plurality of layers capable of displaying an image is provided, and the effect control means executes a background effect according to the progress of the game, and the promotion effect and the said effect. The background effect is an effect executed by displaying the corresponding images on the image display unit, and the image corresponding to the promotion effect has a higher priority than the layer displaying the image corresponding to the background effect. Displayed in higher layers.

According to this configuration, the image corresponding to the promotion effect can be displayed with priority over the image corresponding to the background effect. As a result, the processing load is not increased, and the image corresponding to the background effect in which the image corresponding to the promotion effect is embedded becomes unnecessary, and the image corresponding to the promotion effect can be reliably displayed.

Preferably, the effect control means executes the promotion effect in any one of a plurality of types including a predetermined mode and a special mode, and when a privilege advantageous to the player is given, the privilege is not given. Also, at a high rate, the promotion effect is performed in the special mode.

According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the expectation that the promotion effect is executed in a special mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Preferably, an image display unit capable of displaying an image in a display area by superimposing a plurality of layers capable of displaying an image is provided, and the effect control means displays an image corresponding to the promotion effect on the image display unit. When the promotion effect is executed and the operation is in a standby state in which the operation has not been detected for a predetermined time, the display area is smaller than that in the non-standby state and is located near the edge of the display area. An image corresponding to the promotion effect is displayed, and the effect operation is detected in association with the promotion effect in the standby state, so that a menu effect that enables the game history to be displayed in the display area is executed.

According to this configuration, in the standby state, an image corresponding to the promotion effect can be displayed in a display area closer to the edge than in the non-standby state, and the menu effect is executed when the effect operation is detected. Therefore, in the standby state, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect from being executed in a manner that gives an excessive sense of expectation.

Preferably, the effect operation detected during the promotion effect is effectively accepted.

Preferably, the effect control means has a first mode in which the power consumption of the plurality of types of effect means used for executing the plurality of types of effects is not suppressed, and a second mode in which the power consumption of the plurality of types of effect means is suppressed. Controlled to any of a plurality of modes including, the effect detecting means detects an operation on a predetermined operation unit as the effect operation, and the plurality of types of effect means correspond to the predetermined operation unit. The effect control means includes the light effect means for irradiating light, and the effect control means performs the light effect with the same power consumption regardless of which of the plurality of modes is controlled during the promotion effect. Control the means.

According to this configuration, the light effect means is controlled with the same power consumption during the promotion effect regardless of which of the plurality of modes is controlled. Therefore, regardless of the controlled mode, it is difficult for the player to notice that the promotion effect is being executed, and it is difficult to understand the target to be operated for the effect. it can.

It is a front view of a slot machine. It is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. It is a development view of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating game control processing. It is a figure for demonstrating a role name, a symbol combination, and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning combination group and combination composition. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of each game state and advantageous period. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the process in AT which is executed during AT in the advantageous period setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the addition lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the cumulative number counter processing. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the end determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing when a chance button production can be started. It is a figure for demonstrating the display example of the liquid crystal display when a chance button effect is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the table which is referred to when drawing the pattern of a chance button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the display example in the liquid crystal display when the continuous effect of the pattern which included the chance button effect is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the display example in the liquid crystal display when the continuous effect of the pattern which included the chance button effect is executed. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the net increase number display process which is executed when the bet number is set and 1 game is started. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the net increase number display process which is executed when a medal is given. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the OVER display number of sheets, and the display mode of a predetermined effect such as a net increase number display. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the net increase number display process in RBB. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the end screen processing for displaying the end screen at the end of AT or a bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of various data update processing. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the cumulative number counter and the increase / decrease of the net increase number in an advantageous period. It is a figure for demonstrating the display example at the time of the end of AT from the start of ART until the net increase number reaches "2000". It is a figure for demonstrating the display example and the display example of the end screen when the net increase number reaches "2000" during AT after ART is started. It is a figure for demonstrating the display example and the display example of the end screen when the net increase number reaches "2000" in the bonus controlled by winning RBB in AT after ART is started. It is a figure for demonstrating the display example and the display example of the end screen when the net increase number reaches "2000" during the confirmation screen display of RBB during AT after ART is started. It is a figure for demonstrating the display example and the display example of the end screen when the cumulative number reaches "2370" when the net increase number is displayed in a normal mode after ART is started. A display example and a display example of the end screen when the cumulative number reaches "2370" when the net increase number is displayed in the rainbow mode after the start of ART are shown. It is a figure for demonstrating the mobile interlocking setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display in the player menu state, and the screen displayed on the display part of the communication terminal owned by a player. It is a figure for demonstrating the priority of the area and the layer used for display among the display areas of a liquid crystal display for each of attention display and other image display. It is a timing chart for explaining the effect example about attention display. It is a timing chart for explaining the effect example about attention display. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content of the effect example in a liquid crystal display. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the addition-related effect control process for controlling the effect during AT among the effect control process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the example at the time of undecided upper limit arrival and at the time of confirmed upper limit arrival. It is a figure for demonstrating the display example when the background screen in AT is switched from a normal effect to a special background. It is a figure for demonstrating the display trigger, the end trigger, and the control content at the time of an error occurrence during menu display of each of an administrator menu screen and a player menu screen. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the player menu screen in the player menu state. It is a figure for demonstrating the display example of the production customization screen. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process at power-on. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating error processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the setting change process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the sub-control unit processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the sub-side setting change state processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the sub-side game standby process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating error notification processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the display example at the time of stopping the update display of the net increase number by reaching the upper limit cumulative number. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the cumulative number counter and the increase / decrease of the net increase number in an advantageous period. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a special production. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the production corresponding to the net increase number of sheets. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the end screen. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the game screen in the mobile interlocking. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the display screen.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As a specific example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a slot machine capable of executing a game using a medal as a gaming medium will be described. However, the game machine is not limited to such a slot machine, and does not use a game machine capable of executing a game using a game ball as a game medium or a game medium (value of a tangible object such as a medal) internally. It may be another gaming machine such as a gaming machine capable of performing a game using the given score (value of an intangible object such as information recorded by an electromagnetic method).

<Slot machine configuration example>
The overall configuration of the slot machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened.

The slot machine 1 is composed of a member including a box-shaped housing 3 having an opening on the front surface and a front door 5 which is openably and closably attached to one side of the housing 3. The front surface of the housing 3 is closed by closing the front door 5 with respect to the housing 3. The front door 5 can be locked / unlocked with respect to the housing 3 by a door key managed by the manager of the amusement park. Whether or not the front door 5 is closed with respect to the housing 3 is detected by the door sensor 20.

As shown in FIG. 1, a display window 7 is provided in the central portion of the front door 5. From the display window 7, reels 11L, 11M, 11R (hereinafter, collectively referred to as reels 11L to 11R) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged can be visually recognized. When the reels 11L to 11R rotate, it is possible to visually recognize from the display window 7 a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels 11L to 11R are variably displayed. In this way, the display window 7 and the reels 11L to 11R form a variable display unit 13 that variably displays a plurality of symbols.

The variable display unit 13 includes a plurality of variable display columns 10. Specifically, the variable display unit 13 is a left variable display row 10L composed of a portion of the display window 7 corresponding to the front of the reel 11L and the reel 11L, and a portion of the display window 7 corresponding to the front of the reel 11M. It is provided with a medium variable display row 10M composed of a reel 11M and a right variable display row 10R composed of a portion of the display window 7 corresponding to the front of the reel 11R and the reel 11R. When the reels 11L to 11R are stopped, the left variable display row 10L, the middle variable display row 10M, and the right variable display row 10R can each stop and display the symbols in the upper, middle, and lower rows. Therefore, nine symbols can be visually recognized from the display window 7.

In the present embodiment, a so-called lower line composed of a lower left variable display row 10L, a lower middle variable display row 10M, and a lower right variable display row 10R is set as a winning line to be determined as a winning combination. There is. A winning line NL is drawn on the display window 7.

A liquid crystal display 27 is provided above the display window 7 of the front door 5. The liquid crystal display 27 executes the effect by displaying a predetermined image according to the progress of the game. Further, above the liquid crystal display 27 of the front door 5, an explanation panel 29 on which a predetermined combination of symbols and the number of payouts is printed is provided, and further above and to the left and right of the explanation panel 29. , Lamp portions 33L, 33M, 33R are provided. The lamp units 33L, 33M, and 33R are provided with a light source such as an LED, and emit light according to the progress of the game to execute the effect.

On the left side of the display window 7 of the front door 5, a credit display 45, a payout display 46, a notification display 60, and an advantageous period notification lamp 80 are arranged. The credit display 45 displays the number of medals stored (stored) in the slot machine 1 among the medals owned by the player. The maximum number of credits is set to 50.

The payout display 46 is a display that displays the number of medals (game media) to be paid out when a winning combination occurs, and also displays various information such as error information and setting suggestion information. The setting suggestion information is information that makes it possible to specify at least one of the set values 1 to 6, and is information that suggests the set set value. The notification display 60 is a display that notifies predetermined information for specifying an operation mode (for example, operation timing, push order, etc., hereinafter also referred to as an advantageous operation mode) that is advantageous to the player, a combination lottery result, and the like. It is a vessel. The advantageous period notification lamp 80 is a display that notifies that it is an advantageous period (hereinafter, referred to as an advantageous period) in which an AT game capable of notifying an advantageous operation mode can be tolerated.

The credit display 45, the payout display 46, and the notification display 60 are each composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notify information according to the lighting mode of each segment. Further, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is composed of, for example, an LED, and is turned on in an advantageous period and turned off in a normal period other than the advantageous period.

Various operation units are provided below the display window 7 of the front door 5. The operation unit includes a bet switch 15, a maximum bet switch 17, an effect operation unit 81, a start switch 19, a settlement switch 23, stop switches 21L, 21M, 21R (hereinafter collectively referred to as stop switches 21L to 21R), and A medal slot 25 is provided.

The bet switch 15 is a switch that detects an operation for setting the number of bets for one medal using credits. The maximum bet switch 17 is a switch that detects an operation for setting the number of medals for the maximum number of bets using credits. The maximum number of bets is the maximum number of bets that can be set for one game (hereinafter, also referred to as one game) (in this embodiment, "3" is set except for "in the bonus state", and "in the bonus state" is " 2 ”is set.)

The effect operation unit 81 is a switch for detecting an operation related to the effect. Operations related to the production include operations for executing and developing the production, operations for selecting the production mode and characters, and a player menu for displaying the game history, etc. Administrator menu for displaying the status, setting history, etc. Includes operations for transitioning to the state.

The start switch 19 is a switch that detects an operation for starting the variable display of the symbol by rotating each of the reels 11L to 11R. The settlement switch 23 is a switch that detects an operation for paying out a number of medals corresponding to credits or a set number of bets. The stop switches 21L to 21R are switches for detecting an operation for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels of the reels 11L to 11R to stop the variable display of the symbol. The medal insertion slot 25 is an opening for a player to insert a medal.

Various switches including the effect operation unit 81 detect an operation on the operation unit (button unit) corresponding to each. The operation unit corresponding to various switches is composed of a transmissive member that transmits light. In addition, a light source such as an LED is mounted inside the operation unit corresponding to various switches, and it is produced by emitting light at a timing (timing for effectively accepting the operation) that can be operated according to the progress of the game. To execute.

Below the various operation units on the front door 5, a lower panel 35 on which a character or the like is printed is provided. Further, lower lamp portions 37L and 37R are provided on the left and right sides of the lower panel 35, respectively. The lower lamp portions 37L and 37R are provided with a light source such as an LED, and emit light according to the progress of the game to execute the effect.

Further, below the lower panel 35, a medal payout exit 39 for paying out medals in response to the occurrence of winning a prize and the like, and a medal receiver 41 for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 39 are provided. Speakers 31L and 31R are provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout outlet 39, respectively, for producing effects by outputting sound effects, sounds, and the like according to the progress of the game.

Next, the internal configuration of the housing 3 of the slot machine 1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, a reel unit 9 for accommodating reels 11L to 11R side by side is provided in the center of the housing 3 of the slot machine 1. The reel unit 9 is fixed to the rear wall in the housing 3. The reel unit 9 includes reel motors 14L, 14M, 14R (see FIG. 4, hereinafter also referred to as reel motors 14L to 14R) and position sensors 55L, 55M, 55R (see FIG. 4, hereinafter, position sensors 55L to 55R). It is equipped with.

The reel motors 14L to 14R are fixed side by side with respect to the frame of the reel unit 9, and the corresponding reels of the reels 11L to 11R are fixed to the rotation shaft thereof. As a result, the reel motors 14L to 14R are driven and controlled to rotate and stop. The reel motors 14L to 14R are composed of, for example, stepping motors.

The position sensors 55L to 55R are sensors for detecting that the protrusions provided on the reels 11L to 11R have passed a predetermined position as the reels rotate. The position sensors 55L to 55R are composed of, for example, a photo interrupter. When the position sensors 55L to 55R detect the protrusions of the corresponding reels, the symbol at a predetermined position on the reel (for example, the symbol of symbol number 19 in FIG. 3) is located in the middle of the display window 7. It is configured in.

A main control board 63 and a sub control board 73 are installed above the reel unit 9 in a state of being housed in a board case. The board case cannot come into contact with the control board unless, for example, some members are destroyed so that the traces can be easily discriminated if the control board or the like housed in the board case is illegally identified. It has a structure. Further, the main control board 63 and the sub control board 73 are electrically connected by a signal line connecting the boards.

A hopper unit 43 is provided below the reel unit 9. The hopper unit 43 includes a hopper container 42, a full tank sensor 58 (see FIG. 4), a hopper motor 57 (see FIG. 4), and a payout sensor 54 (see FIG. 4).

The hopper container 42 is a container for storing medals received from the medal slot 25. The full tank sensor 58 is a sensor provided at a predetermined position of the hopper container 42 and detects that the medals stored in the hopper container 42 are in a full tank state when the predetermined amount is reached.

The hopper motor 57 is a motor that is driven when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied and is driven to discharge a predetermined number of medals stored in the hopper container 42. The hopper motor 57 is composed of, for example, a DC motor (Direct Current Motor). The payout sensor 54 is a sensor that detects medals discharged from the hopper container 42 one by one by the hopper motor 57. The medals detected by the payout sensor 54 are paid out from the medal payout outlet 39 via the medal chute 47 provided below the back side of the front door 5.

On the left side of the hopper unit 43, a power supply unit 49 for supplying electric power to various devices included in the slot machine 1 is arranged. The power supply unit 49 is provided with a power supply switch 50, a reset switch 52, and a change processing start switch 56.

The power switch 50 is a switch for switching whether or not to supply power to the slot machine 1. The reset switch 52 is a switch for detecting a setting value switching operation during a setting change process in which the set value can be changed. The reset switch 52 is also used as a switch for canceling an error when an error occurs. The change processing start switch 56 is a switch that includes a key cylinder for setting change processing and detects an operation for shifting to the setting change processing. The switch provided inside the housing 3 including the change processing start switch 56 is a switch that can be operated when the front door 5 is open. Therefore, basically, only the manager of the amusement park can operate it.

The set value is a value for specifying the degree of advantage for the player. Specifically, the set value is a value for specifying the winning probability of winning a predetermined combination in the combination lottery. In the winning combination lottery, the winning probability of winning a winning combination can be made different by using the winning probability according to the set value. That is, when the set value is different, the winning probability of winning in the winning combination lottery may be different even if the winning combination is the same. As a result, the number of medals to be paid out during the execution of the game a predetermined number of times differs depending on the set value, and as a result, the payout rate can be different. Therefore, it can be said that the set value is a value for specifying the degree of advantage for the player and a value for specifying the payout rate. As the set value, for example, 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities (in this embodiment, four stages of set values 1, 2, 5, and 6) are provided, and the set value 1 is the lowest payout rate. , The set value 6 is the highest payout rate. The set value may be set in 6 steps of 1 to 6. The setting value can be changed by shifting to the setting change processing by turning on the power with the change processing start switch 56 turned on by the setting change key managed by the game hall administrator.

The set value can be sequentially switched by operating the reset switch 52 during the setting change process (for example, ... 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 5 ...). During the setting change process, the set value is displayed on the payout display 46. In the setting change process, after the operation to the start switch 19 is detected, the change process start switch 56 is turned off to store the set value displayed at that time. As a result, the change of the set value is completed, and in the subsequent games, a combination lottery or the like, which will be described later, is performed based on the stored set value. When the setting change process is performed, the RAM 65 of the slot machine 1 is initialized.

On the back side of the front door 5, a medal selector 48 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side of the medal insertion slot 25. The medal selector 48 physically selects whether or not the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 are genuine, and the regular medals are stored on the first flow path 40 side for being stored in the hopper container 42. On the other hand, non-regular medals have a structure of guiding to the side of the second flow path 44 for discharging to the outside.

Further, the medal selector 48 includes a switching solenoid 51 (see FIG. 4) and an insertion sensor 53 (see FIG. 4). The switching solenoid 51 is a solenoid for forcibly switching the inserted medals to the second flow path 44 side according to the game situation (for example, during reel rotation, when the credit upper limit is reached, etc.). The insertion sensor 53 is a sensor that detects one medal guided to the first flow path 40 side among the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 25. The medals detected by the insertion sensor 53 are stored in the hopper container 42 in a state where the front door 5 is closed. On the other hand, the medal guided to the second flow path 44 side is discharged from the medal payout outlet 39 via the medal chute 47.

Next, the configuration of the symbol arrangement of each of the reels 11L to 11R will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged in a predetermined order on the reels 11L to 11R, respectively. In FIG. 3, for convenience of explanation, a plurality of types of symbols are indicated by character strings such as "R7", "G7", "BR", "C1", "C2", "BE", "RP", "MD", "T1", and "T2". However, in reality, the patterns corresponding to these character strings are arranged. For example, "R7" is a red "7" pattern, "G7" is a green "7" pattern, "BR" is a "BAR" pattern, "BE" is a "bell" pattern, and "RP" is "Replay" patterns are arranged. The plurality of types of symbols are not limited to the symbols as long as they can be distinguished from other symbols, and may be any pattern, symbols, numbers, or the like. Since "C1" and "C2" are composed of patterns having similar appearances, they are also collectively referred to as "C". Similarly, since "T1" and "T2" are also composed of patterns having similar appearances, they are also collectively referred to as "T".

In FIG. 3, symbol numbers 0 to 19 are shown at the left end thereof, corresponding to a symbol arrangement area in which symbols are arranged on each of the reels 11L to 11R. The symbol numbers 0 to 19 are numbers for specifying which symbol arrangement region is the symbol in each of the reels 11L to 11R of the present embodiment.

In the case of this embodiment, for example, a reel tape on which symbols from symbol numbers 0 to 19 are printed is attached to the peripheral surfaces of the reels 11L to 11R. Therefore, when the reels 11L to 11R rotate, a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on the display window 7 in a predetermined order such as symbol number ... 19 → 18 → 17 → ... 2 → 1 → 0 → 19 → 18 ... Can be made to.

The slot machine 1 having the above configuration has a specified number required to start one game by first inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 25 or operating the bet switch 15 or the like (in the present embodiment, "in the bonus state"). Other than "3", "in bonus state" is set to "2") The number of medals is set so that rotation can be started, and when the start switch 19 is operated, reel 11L ~ One game is started by rotating 11R to display the symbol variably. In the present embodiment, "3" is set as the specified number of game states other than the "bonus state", and "2" is set as the specified number of the "bonus state". The specified number is not limited to this, and may be another value, or the same value may be set regardless of the gaming state.

After one game is started, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped by operating the stop switches 21L to 21R while the reels are rotating, and the rotation of all the reels 11L to 11R is stopped to end one game. To do. The slot machine 1 newly grants a predetermined privilege to the player according to a symbol combination (display result) when all the reels 11L to 11R have stopped rotating. Predetermined benefits include, for example, transition of the game state, automatic setting of the number of bets for the next game without using new medals, and withdrawal of a predetermined number of medals (or credit addition) for granting game value. However, it is not limited to these.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a main control board 63, a sub control board 73, a power supply unit 49, an external output board 90, and the like.

The main control board 63 is a board on which a main CPU 61 that controls the progress of the game is mounted. The sub control board 73 is a board on which a sub CPU 71 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game is mounted. The power supply unit 49 uses electric power supplied from the outside to generate a power source for driving various electric components mounted on the slot machine 1. The external output board 90 is a board that outputs a signal according to the progress of the game to the outside of the slot machine 1 (for example, a hall computer, a data display for each machine, etc.).

The main CPU 61 includes a ROM 67 that stores a game control program for controlling the progress of the game, and a RAM 65 that temporarily stores data related to the game, and is realized by executing the game control program stored in the ROM 67. It has various functions to be performed and various functions realized by controlling the hardware.

The main CPU 61 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, executes a game control program stored in the ROM 67, and is transmitted from a switch (operation means) or a sensor (detection means) connected to the main control board 63. Processes related to the progress of the game based on the signal. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not an error has occurred in the slot machine 1. The errors include, for example, a selector error detected by the closing sensor 53 for a predetermined time or longer, a full tank error in which the hopper container 42 is detected by the full tank sensor 58 to be full, and the hopper motor 57 being driven. Nevertheless, it includes a medal-out error that has not been detected by the payout sensor 54 for a predetermined time or longer.

The switches and sensors connected to the main control board 63 include a closing sensor 53, a bet switch 15, a maximum betting switch 17, a start switch 19, a door sensor 20, stop switches 21L to 21R, and a settlement switch 23, as shown in FIG. , Reset switch 52, change processing start switch 56, position sensors 55L to 55R, payout sensor 54, full tank sensor 58, and the like.

In addition, the main CPU 61 performs processing related to the progress of the game to drive and control the devices connected to the main control board 63. The devices connected to the main control board 63 include a switching solenoid 51, a credit display 45, a payout display 46, a notification display 60, an advantageous period notification lamp 80, and reel motors 14L to 14R, as shown in FIG. , Hopper motor 57, and various LEDs. Further, the main control board 63 is equipped with a display composed of 7-segment LEDs. On the main control board 63, the ratio of staying in the advantageous period for the entire game period, the ratio of the number of bonuses paid out to the total number of medals paid out, and the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period It is equipped with a display that displays the ratio of the total number of payouts to the number of payouts by the navigation effect (instruction) in the bonus state (for example, also referred to as the instruction-included accessory ratio). It should be noted that the advantageous period stay ratio, the accessory ratio, the instruction-included accessory ratio, and the like are not limited to those displayed on the display mounted on the main control board 63, but are separately provided display (for example, payout). It may be displayed on a display 46 or the like). In this case, for example, when the reset switch 52 is operated, the main CPU 61 may display the advantageous period stay ratio, the accessory ratio, the indicated accessory ratio, and the like on the display.

The main control board 63 transmits various commands to the sub control board 73 according to the progress of the game. The sub control board 73 controls the effect based on the command from the main control board 63. On the other hand, a command cannot be sent from the sub control board 73 to the main control board 63. The command is transmitted from the main control board 63 to the sub control board 73 in only one direction.

The sub CPU 71 mounted on the sub control board 73 includes a ROM 77 for storing an effect control program for controlling the effect and a RAM 75 for temporarily storing data related to the effect, and the effect control stored in the ROM 77. It has various functions realized by executing a program and various functions realized by controlling hardware.

The sub CPU 71 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, executes an effect control program stored in the ROM 77 based on a command from the main control board 63, and determines the effect content according to the progress of the game. Etc., and based on the result, the devices connected to the sub-control board 73 are driven and controlled to produce an effect. The devices connected to the sub-control board 73 include speakers 31L and 31R, a liquid crystal display 27, various lamps / LEDs, and an effect operation unit 81 shown in FIG. The liquid crystal display 27 includes a display control unit that executes display processing for displaying an image in the display area. The display control unit executes display processing based on a command for display control from the sub control board 73, and displays a predetermined image in the display area of the liquid crystal display 27. Further, the display control unit can also transmit a command to the sub control board 73 according to the display content. The sub-control board 73 transmits commands corresponding to the speakers 31L, 31R, various lamps, LEDs, and the like based on commands from the display control unit, thereby producing a sound or light effect corresponding to the image displayed in the display area. To execute. The various lamps / LEDs controlled by the sub CPU 71 include LEDs mounted inside the operation unit corresponding to the various switches. The sub CPU 71 can illuminate the operation unit by controlling the LED or the like so that the power consumption corresponds to the controlled mode, depending on whether or not the eco mode is used.

The effect operation unit 81 includes a determination switch 81a for determination, a left selection switch 81b for selection, a right selection switch 81c, an upper selection switch 81d, and a lower selection switch 81e (collectively referred to as up / down / left / right switches). Is provided. The sub CPU 71 executes a promotion effect that prompts an operation on the determination switch 81a when executing or developing a predetermined effect, and executes or develops a predetermined effect by operating the determination switch 81a. Control to make it. Further, the sub CPU 71 is in an effect mode selectable state (during the effect mode selection screen display) in which one of a plurality of types of effect modes having different types of effects (characters and backgrounds) executed by the liquid crystal display 27 or the like can be set. In, one of the effect modes is selected by operating the up / down / left / right switches, and the selected effect mode is set by operating the determination switch 81a.

Further, the sub CPU 71 shifts to the administrator menu state by operating the decision switch 81a when the change processing start switch 56 is operated to shift to the setting change processing, and displays the administrator menu screen on the liquid crystal display. It can be displayed on the vessel 27. On the administrator menu screen, "date and time setting", "setting change history" can be displayed, "mobile phone interlocking service ON / OFF setting", "eco mode setting", and the like can be performed. The eco-mode is a mode in which the power consumed by the production execution by the devices connected to the sub-control board 73 is saved more than in the normal state. When the eco mode is set, for example, control to lower the brightness of the liquid crystal display 27, various lamps / LEDs, control to shorten the driving time or lighting time, and output from the speakers 31L and 31R than in the normal state. Control to lower the volume is performed.

Further, the sub CPU 71 promotes a specific effect (for example, continuous effect continuously over a plurality of games, operation to a specific button) that occurs according to the progress of the game without rotating any of the reels 11L to 11R. The decision switch 81a is in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed without detecting any operation (hereinafter, also referred to as a standby state or a game waiting state) even when the chance button effect) is not executed. Is operated to shift to the player menu state, and the player menu screen can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. In the standby state, a guidance effect (included in the promotion effect) for prompting the operation of the determination switch 81a to guide the player to the player menu state is executed. By operating the decision switch 81a during the guidance effect, the player menu screen is displayed by shifting to the player menu state.

Further, on the player menu screen, a mobile interlocking service for confirming a role history such as the number of times a prize is generated and the probability of occurrence of a prize and accumulating a player's game history according to an operation on the effect operation unit 81. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as mobile interlocking), volume setting output from the speakers 31L and 31R, brightness adjustment of the liquid crystal display 27, and the like can be performed. An example in which the eco-mode can be set in the administrator menu state will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the eco-mode setting may be set in the player menu state.

The sub CPU 71 selects an item or target to be displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switches in the administrator menu state and the player menu state, and responds to the selected item or target by operating the determination switch 81a. Execute the processing. The sub CPU 71 may shift to the player menu state by operating the determination switch 81a even when a specific effect is being executed. In this case, the sub CPU 71 draws an image of a specific effect on a specific layer, and by operating the determination switch 81a, the player menu screen in the player menu state in the layer having a higher priority than the specific layer. By drawing the image of, the player menu screen may be displayed with priority. While the player menu screen is being displayed, the specific effect on the specific layer may be continuously executed, or the specific effect on the specific layer may be temporarily terminated.

In addition, when a specific effect is continuously executed on a specific layer while the player menu screen is displayed, and the effect is a continuous effect that does not involve a chance button effect that prompts an operation on a specific button. The player menu screen can be displayed by operating the decision switch 81a, while the player menu screen is displayed even if the decision switch 81a is operated when the effect is a chance button effect that prompts the operation of a specific button. You may not do it. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the chance button effect from being unintentionally developed to the next stage by operating the determination switch 81a while the player menu screen is being displayed. Further, the switch for displaying the player menu screen and the switch for developing the chance button effect may be the same switch or may be physically different switches. Even if the switch for displaying the player menu screen and the switch for developing the chance button effect are different, the switch for developing the chance button effect is operated while the player menu screen is displayed. It is possible to prevent the production from being unintentionally developed.

<Game control processing>
The main CPU 61 performs a game control process for controlling the progress of the game based on the game control program stored in the ROM 67. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining an example of the game control process.

(Bet number setting process)
In the bet number setting process of S100, the bet number is set according to the detection signal from the input sensor 53, the operation signal from the bet switch 15 or the maximum bet switch 17, the replay flag set at the time of winning the replay combination, and the like. The process for setting is performed. In the bet number setting process, the bet number setting command is output when the bet number is set. When the set number of bets has reached the specified number, the rotation startable state (validation) that effectively accepts the operation to the start switch 19 is set.

Further, in the bet number setting process, a drive signal for driving the hopper motor 57 is output based on the operation signal from the settlement switch 23, and the number of medals corresponding to the credit amount or the set bet number is paid out. Settlement processing is performed. The bet number setting process ends when the operation signal from the start switch 19 is received in a state where the rotation can be started, and the process proceeds to the internal lottery process of S200. In the bet number setting process, when the operation signal from the start switch 19 is received and the process shifts to the internal lottery process, a bet command that can specify the actually set bet number (medal number) is output. As a result, the number of medals set for one game can be specified on the sub-control board 73 side as well.

(Internal lottery process)
In the internal lottery process of S200, a random number value for winning combination lottery is extracted from a random number circuit that updates the random number value in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535), and is predetermined based on the extracted value (hereinafter referred to as an extracted value). A role lottery is held to determine whether or not to win one of a plurality of types of roles. With reference to FIG. 6, the type of combination and the combination name set in the slot machine 1 will be described.

As the types of roles, a bonus role, a replaying role, and a small role are provided. The bonus role is a transition role that involves a transition to a bonus state in which the probability of winning a small role is high. The replay combination (hereinafter, also referred to as replay) is a combination that sets the above-mentioned replay flag when a prize is won. In the bet number setting process, when the re-game flag is set, the specified number of games (this time games) to be started next (from now on) is set without using new medals (or credits) owned by the player. It is a role to automatically set the corresponding bet number as the bet number of the next game. A small role is a role that involves paying out a predetermined number of medals (or adding credits).

As the bonus combination, the combination names "RBB1" and "RBB2" (hereinafter collectively referred to as bonus combination or "RBB") are provided. The symbol combinations of "RBB1" and "RBB2" are defined as three combinations of "R7" and three combinations of "G7", respectively. When "RBB1" and "RBB2" are won, the bonus state is controlled. The bonus state ends with a game in which the number of medals paid out exceeds the number of medals corresponding to the winning bonus combination (the number shown in the remarks column of FIG. 6).

As the re-game combination, the combination names "RPC", "RTT1" to "RTT9" are provided. As the symbol combination of "RPC", a combination of three "RP" is defined. For each of "RTT1" to "RTT9", the symbol combination as shown in FIG. 6 is defined. When the symbol combination of "RTT1" to "RTT9" is stopped at the winning line NL, the "T" symbol is stopped at the lower, middle and upper rows of the reels 11L to 11R, or the "BR" symbol is displayed at the lower row of the reel 11L. The "T" symbol stops at the middle stage of the reel 11M and the upper stage of the reel 11R, and at least a part of the "T" symbol is diagonally aligned in appearance. Further, "RTT1" to "RTT9" are also referred to as promotion replays because they serve as an opportunity to control the advantageous RT.

As the small role, the role names "BEL", "ATA1" to "ATA12", and "CH" are provided. As the symbol combination of "BEL", a combination of three "BE" is defined. For "ATA1" to "ATA12" and "CH", the symbol combinations as shown in FIG. 6 are defined respectively. In the gaming state (other than the "bonus state") where the specified number is set to "3", "BEL" will be awarded when the push order is correct, and 9 medals will be paid out, whereas the specified number will be paid out. In the "bonus state" where is set to "2", a prize is won regardless of the pressing order and 12 medals are paid out. "ATA1" to "ATA12" can be won according to the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R when the pressing order is incorrect (failed), and one medal is paid out. One medal will be paid out for "CH" when a prize is won.

In the internal lottery process, a combination lottery is performed for each of a plurality of types of winning combination groups composed of predetermined combinations among the combinations shown in FIG. The winning combination group and combination composition in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

"Bonus 1" and "Bonus 2" are provided as the winning combination group including the bonus combination. "Bonus 1" and "Bonus 2" are winning combination groups each consisting of one bonus combination. The winning combination group including the bonus combination may include not only the bonus combination but also the winning combination group that is elected at the same time as another combination (for example, CH).

As the winning combination group of the re-game combination, "normal lip" and "promotion lip" are provided. The "normal lip" is a winning combination group consisting only of "RPC". On the other hand, "promotion lip" is a winning combination group composed of "RTT1" to "RTT9".

As the winning combination group of the small role, "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" and "one piece combination" are provided. In addition to "BEL", "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" include two or more types of combinations of "ATA1" to "ATA12", which are different combinations from each other. It is a winning combination group composed of. "Left correct answer bell 1" to "Right correct answer bell 4" are also collectively referred to as "push order bell". "One-card combination" is a winning combination group composed of "CH".

Of these plurality of types of winning combination groups, the winning combination group to be subject to the combination lottery is determined for each of the plurality of types of gaming states. Further, the determination value related to the winning probability in the winning combination lottery is determined according to the winning combination group, the controlled game state, and the set value set.

The game states that can be controlled in the slot machine 1 include the "RBB internal winning state" in which "initial RT", "normal RT", "advantageous RT", and "RBB" are won, and the winning of a bonus combination. "Bonus state" etc. are provided. The "initial RT", "normal RT", and "advantageous RT" are also collectively referred to as a general gaming state.

Among the winning combination groups including the bonus combination, "bonus 1" and "bonus 2" are subject to the combination lottery in the general gaming state. Each winning combination group including the bonus combination has a determination value set so that the winning probability is 1/1000 when the set value is 1, for example. As the judgment value of the winning combination group including the bonus combination, different judgment values are set according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability. For example, when the set value is 6, the determination value is set so that the winning probability is 1/900. The "bonus 1" and "bonus 2" may have determination values set so as to win with a uniform probability regardless of the set value.

Next, among the winning combination groups including the re-gaming combination, the "normal lip" is subject to the combination lottery in the general gaming state and the "RBB internal winning state", and the winning probability during the "advantageous RT" is 1 / 1.7. Therefore, the determination value is set so that the winning probability in the "normal RT" and the "initial RT" is 1/8, and the winning probability in the "RBB internal winning state" is 1/3. In addition, the "promotion lip" is subject to the winning combination lottery only in the "normal RT", and the determination value is set so that the winning probability is 1/20. The winning probability of the winning combination group including the re-game combination is the winning probability according to the type of RT being controlled.

Judgment values are stored so that the probability of winning either the normal lip or the promotion lip has a relationship of "normal RT" ≤ "initial RT" <"RBB internal winning state" <"advantageous RT". Therefore, it can be said that the "advantageous RT" among the general gaming states is an advantageous state for the player because the probability of winning the re-game combination is improved as compared with other gaming states.

Among the winning combination groups including small roles, "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" are subject to the combination lottery in the general game state, "RBB internal winning state", and "bonus state". The probability of winning any of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" is 1/5 in the general game state, and each of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" is won. Judgment values are evenly distributed so that the probabilities are the same. In the "bonus state", the judgment value is set so that all of "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" are won with a probability of 1/1, and "left correct answer bell 4" is set for each game. Win all of "1" to "Right correct answer bell 4" and win "BEL". It can be said that the "bonus state" is an advantageous state for the player because the probability of winning the "BEL" is improved as compared with the general game state and the like.

The "one-card combination" is subject to the combination lottery in the general game state and the "RBB internal winning state". The probability of winning the "single card combination" during a general game state is determined by a common judgment value regardless of the set value so that the probability of winning is 1/50 regardless of which set value is set. Has been done. The winning combination group is not limited to the types shown in FIG. Further, the winning combination group in which the setting difference is provided and the winning combination group in which the setting difference is not provided are not limited to the winning combination group described with reference to FIG. 7.

In the internal lottery process, the judgment value (judgment value according to the set setting value) of the winning combination group that is the target of the combination lottery in the current game state is read and subtracted from the extraction value (the extraction value is updated). Judgment processing is performed to determine whether or not is smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 0), and if it is not a small value (for example, when it is 0 or more), determination processing is performed for the next winning combination group. Repeat the cycle.

When it is determined in the determination process for any of the winning combination groups that the value is smaller than the predetermined value, it is determined that the winning combination group has been elected, and the winning flag of the combination included in the winning combination group is determined. Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 65, and the winning combination lottery is completed. Therefore, the probability of winning the winning combination group is "determination value of the winning combination group / 65536". It can be said that the winning combination group has a high winning probability because the larger the determination value read in the combination lottery, the more likely it is to be smaller than the predetermined value. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the winning combination groups that are the target of the combination lottery are not smaller than the predetermined value, no winning combination group has been elected. Is determined to be. The probability of "missing" in this embodiment is set to be about 19% during advantageous RT, but is not limited to this, and is, for example, an extremely low probability (5%, etc.). It may be defined.

In the internal lottery process, if it is determined that one of the winning combination groups has been won, or if it is determined that no winning combination group has been elected and it is "missing", the combination lottery is terminated. , S300 shifts to advantageous period related processing.

In the internal lottery process, a process for outputting a winning type command capable of specifying the type of the winning combination group won in the combination lottery to the sub-control board 73 is performed. For example, when "Bonus 1" or "Bonus 2" is won, a winning type command that can identify that one of the "RBBs" is won is output, and when "Normal Lip" or "Promotion Lip" is won, anytime A winning type command that can identify that the player has won the replay role is output, and when any of "Left correct answer bell 1" to "Right correct answer bell 4" is won, the push order bell is won. Outputs a winning type command that can identify that. As a result, on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute an effect according to the type of the winning combination group.

(Advantageous period related processing)
In the advantageous period-related processing of S300, the processing related to the advantageous period is performed. In the present embodiment, it is possible to control the advantageous period by satisfying the predetermined advantageous period transition condition in the normal period. The advantageous period includes the advantageous general, the chance zone (hereinafter referred to as CZ), and the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT). The general advantage is the period during which the CZ transition lottery for whether or not to transition to CZ can be executed. The CZ is a period during which the AT transition lottery for whether or not to shift the AT game to an executable AT can be executed. In addition, the AT transition lottery may be executed in addition to the CZ transition lottery even in the advantageous general. In this case, for example, when the probability of winning in the AT transition lottery is in the CZ rather than in the advantageous general. May be set to be higher.

Among the advantageous periods, the advantageous general and CZ are periods in which the payout rate during the period does not exceed 1 (for example, also referred to as a non-ball-out period during the advantageous period), whereas in the AT, the AT game is performed. It can be said that this is a period in which the payout rate during AT exceeds 1 (for example, also referred to as a ball-out period during the advantageous period) as a result of being able to maintain the advantageous RT (RT1 with a high probability of winning the replaying combination). In the advantageous period, the advantage is generally controlled first. Further, in the general advantage, the CZ can be controlled by winning in the CZ transition lottery performed when the predetermined CZ transition lottery conditions are satisfied. Further, in the CZ, the AT can be controlled by winning in the AT transition lottery performed when a predetermined AT transition lottery condition is satisfied. Therefore, it can be said that the advantageous period is a period that can be controlled by the AT. Further, it can be said that the AT during the advantageous period is in an advantageous state for the player.

The predetermined advantageous period transition condition includes a condition that is satisfied based on the result of the winning combination lottery in the internal lottery process, for example, a condition that is satisfied by winning any of the winning combination groups shown in FIG. The conditions for transition to the advantageous period are also established by winning the winning combination group with a setting difference in the winning probability, and also by winning the winning combination group with no setting difference in the winning probability. To do. The conditions for transition to the advantageous period may be satisfied by winning a specific winning combination group that is uniformly defined regardless of the type of state in which the winning probability in the winning combination lottery is controlled. "The winning probability in the winning combination lottery is uniformly determined regardless of the type of controlled state" means that the winning probability in the winning combination lottery is uniformly determined in any of the states described later with reference to FIG. It means what is.

Further, each of the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition and the predetermined AT transition lottery condition includes, for example, a condition established by winning the "one-card combination" and a condition established by winning the "bonus 1" or "bonus 2". Therefore, for example, when the "one-card combination", "bonus 1", or "bonus 2" is won, the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, and the CZ transition lottery condition and the AT transition lottery condition are satisfied. As a result, even in the normal period, by winning the "1 card combination", "bonus 1" or "bonus 2", by winning in the CZ transition lottery and the AT transition lottery, the AT will be in the advantageous period. It can also occur if it is controlled. The advantageous period transition condition, the CZ transition lottery condition, and the AT transition lottery condition may be exactly the same condition, may be completely different conditions, or may include common conditions. ..

The conditions for ending the advantageous period are the first condition that is established when the advantageous period counter = 1500 indicating that the upper limit value of the advantageous period (for example, the maximum number of games: 1500) is reached, and the number of bets in the advantageous period. The lowest cumulative number, which is the total number of differences based on the number of medals and the number of medals awarded, is set to 0 as the base point, and the current cumulative number from that base point reaches the upper limit of the advantageous period (for example, the upper limit cumulative number: 2400). The second condition that is satisfied by the above is included. The cumulative number is specified according to the value of the cumulative number counter that is updated during the advantageous period. Both the advantageous period counter and the cumulative number counter are updated in a predetermined area of the RAM 65.

The conditions for ending the advantageous period include a third condition that is established by digesting the game a predetermined number of times (CZ non-winning) without being transferred to CZ during general advantage, and shifting to AT during CZ. The fourth condition that is satisfied by digesting the game a predetermined number of times without doing so (AT non-winning), the fifth condition that is satisfied when the remaining AT game counter = 0 and the AT ends during AT, etc. Including. In the following, the conditions for ending the advantageous period (general advantage, either CZ or AT) are collectively referred to as "conditions for ending the advantageous period". The condition for ending the advantageous period is not limited to the one illustrated in the present embodiment as long as it includes at least the first condition and the second condition, and may be a condition that can be satisfied by another specific event. Good.

In the advantageous period-related processing, during the advantageous period, the advantageous period may end with the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, the predetermined AT transition lottery condition (for example, winning a predetermined winning combination group), and the end of this game. It is determined whether or not the situation (for example, the maximum number of games (1500) or the maximum cumulative number (2400) of the advantageous period has been reached by this game), and if the situation can be satisfied, the condition may be satisfied. Perform a production that incites something. For example, the main CPU 61 drives and controls the payout display 46, the notification display 60, and the like in a manner in which all segments are blinked.

Further, in the advantageous period-related processing, when the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, the predetermined AT transition lottery condition, and the situation where the advantageous period can end with the end of the current game during the advantageous period, the main CPU 61 A condition-related command that can specify a condition that may be satisfied is output to the sub-control board 73. Thereby, for example, the liquid crystal display 27 can notify the possibility that each of the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, the predetermined AT transition lottery condition, and the condition for terminating the advantageous period is satisfied. As described above, the advantageous period-related processing executes the processing according to whether or not the conditions related to the advantageous period can be satisfied. The process for actually shifting to the advantageous period and the process for determining whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied and ending the advantageous period are performed by the advantageous period setting process of S700 described later. Will be

Further, in the advantageous period-related processing, it is possible to execute the notification processing for notifying the advantageous operation mode by the notification display 60 according to the result of the winning combination lottery during the AT during the advantageous period. For example, when the "left correct answer bell 1" is won in the winning combination group, the notification display 60 is configured to stop from the left reel 11L in order to win the "BEL" as described later. The notification display 60 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the segment (two upper and lower sides on the left side and one on the lower side) at the position corresponding to the capital letter "L" of the alphabet among the seven segments is lit. Further, in the advantageous period-related processing, an advantageous operation mode command that can specify the advantageous operation mode is output. As a result, the effect for notifying the advantageous operation mode can be executed on the liquid crystal display 27 or the like on the sub control board 73 side as well. When the advantageous period-related processing is completed, the process shifts to the reel control processing of S400.

(Reel control processing)
In the reel control process of S400, the reel motors 14L to 14R are driven and controlled to rotate and stop the reels 11L to 11R. In the reel control process, it is determined whether or not the wait time has elapsed. The wait time is set to, for example, 4.1 seconds, and the measurement is started after the rotation of each of the reels 11L to 11R is started in the reel control process of the previous game.

In the reel control process, when it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the reel rotation process for starting the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R is performed. As a result, the timing for starting the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R in the current game can be delayed until at least 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the rotation of each of the reels 11L to 11R was started in the previous game. In the reel rotation process, when the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R starts, a reel rotation start command is output.

In the reel control process, after each of the reels 11L to 11R is started to rotate and reaches a constant speed (for example, after the excitation pattern of the reel motors 14L to 14R becomes an excitation pattern having a constant speed), the reels 11L to 11R When each reference position is detected by each of the position sensors 55L to 55R, the stop operation is possible, and the operation to the stop switches 21L to 21R is effectively accepted (validation).

Further, in the reel control process, when the stop switch is operated in a state where the stop operation is possible, for example, the symbols located on the winning line NL of the reel corresponding to the stop switch are arranged within a predetermined retractable range. A reel stop process is performed in which one of the symbols is drawn into the winning line NL to stop the reel. The retractable range is the range up to 4 symbols, and when the stop switch is operated, the symbols arranged from the symbols on the winning line NL to the 4 symbols can be stopped on the winning line NL. Become.

If any of the winning roles is won in the role lottery, when the symbols that make up the winning combination can be drawn onto the winning line within the drawable range, the symbols are drawn onto the winning line. Stop it. On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, a symbol that is a combination of out-of-order symbols that does not win any winning combination is drawn onto the winning line and stopped. Therefore, when the stop switch is operated, if the symbols constituting the winning combination can be drawn onto the winning line NL within the pullable range, the symbols are pulled into the winning line NL. While it can be stopped, the symbol combination of the winning combination will not be stopped on the winning line NL.

In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, "when any of the winning roles is won in the winning combination lottery, the symbols constituting the winning winning combination can be drawn into the winning line within the drawable range. It is a thing. Here, since the role lottery is performed for each "winning role group", the "winning role" corresponds to any of the roles constituting the winning "winning role group" in detail. It becomes a thing.

In the reel stop process, the symbols within the retractable range can be stopped on the winning line NL, but the symbols outside the retractable range cannot be stopped on the winning line NL. For this reason, in the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R, for a combination in which the symbols constituting the combination do not exist within the retractable range, even if the combination is won in the combination lottery, if the operation timing does not match, the winning line There may be a case (non-winning) in which the symbol constituting the winning combination cannot be drawn on the NL and the winning combination is missed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the "bonus combination" have parts that do not exist within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reels. For example, only one symbol "R7" constituting "RBB1" is arranged on the reels 11L to 11R. Further, with respect to the symbols constituting "RBB2", there are some parts of at least one reel that do not exist within the retractable range. For this reason, even if the "bonus combination" is won, it may not be possible to draw the symbols constituting the bonus combination into the winning line depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R, and there is a possibility that the "bonus combination" will be missed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, when one of the "bonus combinations" is won, the reel control is performed to draw in the winning bonus combination within the drawable range, but no combination is won. Occurs. Regarding "RBB1" and "RBB2", if the winning game cannot be won, the process of carrying over the winning flag of the bonus combination is performed until the bonus combination is won under the control of the RBB internal winning state. Will be.

As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols "RP" constituting the "RPC" included in the "normal lip" are arranged within the retractable range in all the reels 11L to 11R. In addition, the symbols that make up each of "RTT1" to "RTT9" included in the "promotion lip" have some parts that do not exist within the retractable range in the reel symbol arrangement, but when the "promotion lip" is won, "RTT1" ~ Win all of "RTT9". As a result, when the "promotion lip" is won, any one of "RTT1" to "RTT9" can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R.

As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols (“R7” and “MD”) constituting the “CH” included in the “single combination” of the small combinations have some parts that do not exist within the retractable range in the reel symbol arrangement. To do. For this reason, even if the "single card combination" is won, it may not be possible to draw the symbols constituting the "CH" into the winning line depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R, and there is a possibility that the symbols will be missed. ..

Further, in the reel stop processing, when a plurality of types of winning combinations are won, depending on the type of winning winning combination (result of the winning combination lottery), the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R, and the pressing order (operation mode). , The target to be drawn in with priority is predetermined.

Here, the reel stop processing when any one of "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" is won will be described. When any of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" is won, it is determined that the target to be pulled in is different depending on the type of the first stopped reel. The first stop means that the reels are stopped first when all the reels 11L to 11R are rotating. The first stopped reel is also referred to as a first stopped reel. Further, the second stop means to stop when one reel is stopped by the first stop and the remaining two reels are rotating, and the third stop means that the remaining one reel is rotating. Sometimes it means to stop. The operations on the stop switch for the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop are also referred to as the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation.

For example, when the "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" is won, as shown in FIG. 7, when the left first stop (the left reel 11L is the first stop), "BEL" has priority over other roles. It is stipulated to pull in. Since the symbols "BE" constituting the "BEL" are arranged within the retractable range, the "BEL" is not missed. Therefore, when the "left correct answer bell 1" is won, the reel control is performed so that the "BEL" is always won when the left first stop is made.

On the other hand, when the "left correct answer bell 1" is won and the middle or right first stop (the middle or right reel 11M or 11R is the first stop), the "BEL" is won at the same time. It is stipulated that "ATA1" or "ATA4" should be preferentially drawn in. None of the symbols "R7", "T1", and "T2" constituting "ATA1" and "ATA4" are arranged within the retractable range from the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R as shown in FIG. There is a place. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, it is not possible to draw the symbols that make up "ATA1" and "ATA4" into the winning line, and even if the "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" is won, any role will be won. Sometimes it is not possible.

Also, even when "Left Correct Answer Bell 2" to "Left Correct Answer Bell 4" are won, "BEL" can always be won when the left first stop is made, but from "BEL" when the middle or right first stop is made. Since the other winning combinations are preferentially drawn in, and the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R is a symbol arrangement in which the symbols constituting the other winning combination cannot be drawn in, the stop switch is used. Depending on the operation timing of, it may not be possible to win any of the winning combinations. Similarly, even when "Middle Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Middle Correct Answer Bell 4" are won, "BEL" can always be won when the first middle stop is stopped. However, when the first stop is made on the left or right, the other winning combinations are preferentially drawn in over the "BEL", and the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R draws in the symbols constituting the other winning combination. Since there are some parts that cannot be played, it may not be possible to win any of the winning combinations depending on the operation timing of the stop switch. Also, even when "Right Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" are won, "BEL" can always be won when the right first stop is made, but when the left or middle first stop is made, from "BEL". Is a stop switch because the other winning combinations are preferentially drawn in, and the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R is a symbol arrangement in which the symbols constituting the other winning combination cannot be drawn in. Depending on the operation timing of, it may not be possible to win any of the winning combinations. When all of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" are won (for example, during "bonus state"), regardless of the operation mode of the stop switches 21L to 21R, " Reel control is performed so as to win a prize in "BEL".

The push order in which "BEL" is won when any of "Left correct answer bell 1" to "Right correct answer bell 4" is won is also called a correct answer procedure. When any of "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" is won during the above-mentioned AT, information that can identify the correct answer procedure is notified as an advantageous operation mode.

When any of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" is won, none of the winning roles of "ATA1" to "ATA12" cannot be operated by the correct answer procedure. When the stop operation is performed at the timing when the prize cannot be won, the specific combination of the "missing" symbols will not stop on the winning line unless the "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4" are won. Reel control is performed to draw the "missing" symbol combination of the above onto the winning line. A particular "missing" symbol combination is accompanied by a transition to "normal RT" when stopped on the winning line NL at "initial RT" or "advantageous RT". For this reason, a particular "missing" symbol combination is also referred to as a normal transition roll (see FIG. 7).

In addition, in the reel stop processing when the winning of the bonus role is carried over (the RBB internal winning state) and the re-game role or the small role is won, the re-game role or the small role is drawn in with priority over the bonus role. It is stipulated as.

In the reel stop processing, every time any of the reels 11L to 11R is stopped, a reel stop command that can specify the stopped reel and the stop position (for example, the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the middle stage) is issued. Output. As a result, the sub-control board 73 can identify the stopped reel and the stop position, and can execute the corresponding effect. When all the reels 11L to 11R are stopped, the process shifts to the result determination process of S500.

(Die judgment processing)
In the result determination process of S500, the process corresponding to the symbol combination is executed based on the symbol combination on the winning line NL. For example, when a small winning combination wins, the medals described in the payout column of FIG. 6 are paid out, or a payout process for adding credits is executed. In the payout process, a payout command that can specify the number of medals (including 0) given to the player by paying out medals or adding credits is output. As a result, the number of medals given to the player as a result of one game can be specified on the sub control board 73 side as well. In addition, when the re-game combination wins a prize, a process for setting the re-game flag is executed. In the roll determination process, a game result command that can specify the symbol combination on the winning line NL, the presence or absence of winning, the type of winning combination, and the like is output. As a result, on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute an effect according to the symbol combination on the winning line NL. Further, in the roll determination process, the advantageous period stay ratio and the accessory ratio are updated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 65 according to the result of the game. When the result determination process is completed, the process proceeds to the game state setting process of S600.

(Game state setting process)
In the game state setting process of S600, a game state flag that can specify the game state from the next time onward is set based on the result of the winning combination lottery or the game. The game state flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 65. The main CPU 61 identifies the currently controlled gaming state based on the gaming state flag. FIG. 8A shows the transition of the gaming state.

The game state setting process sets a game state flag that can identify the "normal RT" when the normal transition roll is stopped on the winning line NL in the "initial RT" or the "advantageous RT". In addition, the game state setting process sets a game state flag that can identify the "advantageous RT" when winning the promotion replays "RTT1" to "RTT9" in the "normal RT".

In addition, the game state setting process can specify the "RBB internal winning state" when no prize is won in the game in which the "RBB" is won in any of the "initial RT", "normal RT", and "advantageous RT". Set the game status flag. In addition, the game state setting process sets a game state flag that can specify the "bonus state" when the "RBB" is won. The game state setting process counts the number of payouts in the "bonus state" and sets a game state flag capable of specifying the "initial RT" when the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number. Further, the slot machine 1 sets a game state flag capable of specifying the "initial RT" when it is initialized by changing the setting or the like. When the game state setting process is completed, the process shifts to the advantageous period setting process of S700.

Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 8A. In the following, first, the transition of the gaming state when the AT is not controlled during the advantageous period (hereinafter, also referred to as non-AT) will be described.

When the slot machine 1 is initialized due to a setting change or the like, the slot machine 1 is set to the initial RT as a game state and the game is started. In the initial RT, while the "push order bell" is won with a relatively high probability (1/5), the AT game that notifies the advantageous operation mode is not performed when the "push order bell" is won. For this reason, the push order bell is dropped at a relatively early timing, the normal transition roll is stopped, and the normal RT is controlled.

In normal RT, if the "promotion lip" is won and the "promotion replay" wins, it is controlled to an advantageous RT. However, since it is still non-AT after being controlled by the advantageous RT, as a result of winning the "push order bell" with a relatively high probability as in the initial RT, the normal transition roll is stopped at a relatively early timing. Will be controlled by "normal RT". Therefore, during non-AT, most of the games are played in normal RT.

Further, even if the "RBB" is won during normal RT or the like, the prize cannot be won unless the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbols constituting the "RBB" can be drawn onto the winning line NL. As a result, if it is not possible to win a prize in the game in which the "RBB" is won, it is controlled to the "RBB internal winning state".

If you win the "RBB", it will be controlled to the "bonus state". During RBB, as a result of winning all of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" with high probability, "BEL" can be won regardless of the operation mode, so medals can be obtained efficiently. it can. When the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number, the bonus ends and the "initial RT" is controlled.

On the other hand, when the AT is controlled during the advantageous period, when the "push order bell" is won during the "normal RT" and "advantageous RT", the advantageous operation mode for winning the "BEL" is for notification. Notified by the display 60 and the liquid crystal display 27. As a result, as long as the stop operation is not mistaken, the "BEL" can be reliably won. As a result, the rate at which nine medals are paid out increases. In addition, since it is possible to avoid a normal transition, it is possible to prevent the player from falling from "advantageous RT" to "normal RT", and it is advantageous to maintain a high rate of winning / winning a "replaying role". You can play the game in the state. The CZ in the advantageous period ends by notifying the advantageous operation mode when the "push order bell" is won after the game has been played a predetermined number of times.

Further, after the winning RBB is completed during the AT, the number of AT games is carried over, so that the AT is in progress again, and the advantageous operation mode is notified and controlled to the "advantageous RT". The period controlled by "initial RT" and "normal RT" until controlled by "advantageous RT" after the RBB won during AT ends is in the preparatory stage until controlled by "advantageous RT". Therefore, it is also called the preparation period. In addition, when the "push order bell" is won during the "initial RT" controlled after the RBB won during AT is completed, the "bell" is won so that it can be transferred to the "normal RT". The advantageous operation mode for causing the operation is not notified.

(Advantageous period setting process)
In the advantageous period setting process of S700, the advantageous period is controlled based on the fact that the advantageous period transition condition is satisfied in the normal period. In the advantageous period setting process, the advantageous general flag is set based on the establishment of the advantageous period transition condition, and the advantageous general control is performed as shown in FIG. 8 (b). When controlling in general, an advantageous general game number counter is set to specify the number of games that can be controlled in general. Advantage In general, the number of games that can be controlled is determined by lottery from, for example, the number of games from 0 to 750. It should be noted that the number of games that can be controlled in general is not limited to those determined from the number of these games, and may be a predetermined number of games. Further, when controlled in the advantageous period, an upper limit value of 1500 is set as an advantageous period counter for specifying the number of games executed since the advantageous period was started.

Further, in the advantageous period setting process, when it is determined that the CZ transition lottery has been won during the advantageous general period, the CZ flag is set to control the CZ. At this time, a CZ game number counter for specifying the number of games that can be controlled in CZ during the advantageous period is set. The number of games that can be controlled by the CZ is determined by lottery from, for example, the number of games from 0 to 750. The number of games that can be controlled by the CZ is not limited to those determined from the number of these games, and may be a predetermined number of games. Further, in the advantageous period setting process, when it is determined that the AT transition lottery has been won during CZ, the AT flag is set and the AT is controlled. At this time, in the advantageous period setting process, the remaining AT game number counter for specifying the number of games that can be controlled by the AT in the advantageous period is set. The main CPU 61 controls the advantageous period including the advantageous general, CZ, and AT based on the values of these counters. The advantageous general game number counter, the CZ game number counter, the remaining AT game number counter, and the advantageous period counter are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 65. The main CPU 61 identifies whether the current period is the advantageous period or the normal period based on the advantageous period counter, and which state of the advantageous period is based on the advantageous general flag, the CZ flag, and the AT flag. To identify.

The setting and transition of the advantageous period will be described below with reference to FIG. 8 (b). The sub-control board 73 executes the effect based on the state command for specifying the controlled state and the period as described later. For example, the liquid crystal display 27 or the like may display a background image according to a controlled state or a period. Specifically, in the advantageous general period of the normal period and the advantageous period, a background image reminiscent of the daytime is displayed. On the other hand, in the CZ during the advantageous period, a background image reminiscent of the evening or night may be displayed. In the AT, a background image (see FIG. 20 and the like) corresponding to the AT may be displayed. In this way, the controlled state and period may be specified from the content of the production. Further, in any state, various effects (chance button effect, continuous effect, battle effect, etc.) can be executed.

In the advantageous period setting process in the normal period, when a predetermined advantageous period transition condition is satisfied in this game, the number of advantageous general games is determined, the number of games is set in the advantageous general game number counter, and the advantageous general is used. Set a flag to control the advantageous period (general advantage of the advantageous period). As a result, as shown in FIG. 8B, the advantage in general from the normal period to the advantageous period is controlled. As described above, when the advantageous period is started, the value of the advantageous period counter is set to 1500, which is the upper limit of the advantageous period.

In the advantageous period setting process after being controlled to the advantageous period, the advantageous general game number counter is decremented by 1 and the value of the advantageous period counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed. In the present embodiment, an example in which the end determination of the advantage general is performed based on whether or not the advantage general game number counter is subtracted for each game and reaches 0 (subtraction method) will be described. Is not limited to the subtraction method, for example, the number of advantageous general games counter is added by 1 for each game, and the count value is determined depending on whether or not the predetermined value (number of advantageous general games) is reached (addition method). It may be. Similarly, the subtractive method is exemplified in the present embodiment for the end determination of each of the CZ and AT, which will be described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the end determination of each of the CZ and AT may be performed by the addition method. .. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the advantageous period counter is subtracted by 1 for each game and the end of the advantageous period is determined depending on whether or not the count value reaches 0 will be described. The determination is not limited to the subtractive method, and depends on whether or not the count value reaches the upper limit value (upper limit value 1500 of the advantageous period) by adding 1 to the advantageous period counter for each game (addition method). , The end determination of the advantageous period may be performed.

In the advantageous period setting process in the advantageous general, it is determined whether or not either the CZ transition lottery condition or the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied in this game. When a predetermined CZ transition lottery condition is satisfied in the game this time, a CZ transition lottery is executed to determine whether or not to control the CZ and the number of games that can be controlled by the CZ (that is, the advantage of the CZ).

The CZ transition lottery is performed with reference to a predetermined CZ transition lottery table stored in the ROM 67. The CZ transition lottery table is set so that the CZ transition lottery is performed according to the ratio according to the established CZ transition lottery conditions. For example, when the CZ transition lottery condition is satisfied by winning the "one-card combination", it is determined that "non-winning" is determined at a rate of 10% and that CZ is controlled at a rate of 90%. Further, when controlling to CZ, the number of games that can be controlled to CZ is determined. The number of games that can be controlled by the CZ is determined by lottery from, for example, the number of games from 0 to 750. The number of games that can be controlled by the CZ is not limited to those determined from the number of these games, and may be a predetermined number of games.

When it is decided to control to CZ, in the advantageous period setting process, the number of games determined by the CZ transition lottery after the number of games (for example, 3 times) for executing a predetermined effect (for example, continuous effect) is exhausted. Is set in the CZ game number counter and the CZ flag is set. The advantageous general game number counter and the advantageous general flag are reset. As a result, as shown in FIG. 8B, it is controlled to CZ during the advantageous period.

The CZ transition lottery is collectively performed using the extracted values extracted for the winning combination lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as a batch lottery method). For example, the determination value for winning the "one-card combination" is determined so as to be the above-mentioned distribution rate, and the advantageous period transition lottery is performed depending on which of the extracted values belongs. The advantageous period transition lottery is performed at the end of one game, but is not limited to this, and may be collectively performed at the time of the winning combination lottery in the internal lottery process. The CZ transition lottery is not limited to the batch lottery method as long as it is performed according to the result of the combination lottery. It may be extracted and the CZ transition lottery is performed using the random number.

When the advantageous general game number counter becomes "0" and the determined number of games is exhausted without determining that the CZ is controlled by the CZ transition lottery, the CZ non-winning indicating that the CZ is not won in the advantageous period setting process. Performs CZ non-winning notification processing for performing winning notification. The CZ non-winning notification process is, for example, a process of driving and controlling a notification display 60 or the like so as to display “−−”, or outputting a CZ non-winning command capable of identifying CZ non-winning to the sub control board 73. This includes a process for displaying a message such as "Sorry!" On the liquid crystal display 27. As a result, the player can be notified of the CZ non-winning. Further, in the advantageous period setting process, it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied in CZ.

When the CZ non-winning condition and the condition for terminating the advantageous general are satisfied, the advantageous general flag is erased in the advantageous period setting process, and the advantageous period is terminated and the normal period is entered as shown in FIG. 8 (b).

On the other hand, when it is decided to control to CZ in the CZ transition lottery in the general advantage, for example, a CZ winning command capable of identifying the CZ winning is output to the sub control board 73, and the background image on the liquid crystal display 27 is displayed. Switch to the background image corresponding to CZ. At the time of winning the CZ, the CZ is controlled from a predetermined CZ start timing (for example, after the three games in which the continuous production ends).

In the advantageous period setting process in CZ, it is determined whether or not either the AT transition lottery condition or the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied in this game. When it is determined that the AT transition lottery condition is satisfied, the AT transition lottery for determining whether to control the AT according to the established AT transition lottery condition and the number of AT games during the period controlled by the AT is performed. Do. The AT transition lottery is performed with reference to a predetermined AT transition lottery table stored in the ROM 67. The AT transition lottery table is defined so that the AT transition lottery is performed according to the ratio according to the established AT transition lottery conditions. For example, when the AT transition lottery condition is satisfied by winning the "one-card combination" in CZ, it is decided that "non-winning" is determined at a rate of 10% and that AT is controlled at a rate of 90%. To. Depending on which AT transition lottery condition is satisfied, the distribution rate or the like is set so that the AT has a different advantage (the AT winning probability is different).

Like the CZ transition lottery, the AT transition lottery is performed by a batch lottery method. For example, the determination value for winning the "one-card combination" is determined so as to be the above-mentioned distribution rate, and the AT transition lottery is performed depending on which of the extracted values belongs. The AT transition lottery is performed at the end of one game, but is not limited to this, and may be collectively performed at the time of the combination lottery in the internal lottery process. The AT transition lottery is not limited to the batch lottery method as long as it is performed according to the result of the combination lottery. It may be extracted and the AT transition lottery is performed using the random number.

When the CZ game number counter becomes "0" and the determined number of games is exhausted without being determined to be controlled by the AT by the AT transition lottery, the AT non-winning indicating that the AT is not won in the advantageous period setting process. AT non-winning notification processing for notification is performed. In the AT non-winning notification process, for example, a process of driving and controlling the notification display 60 or the like so as to display “−−” or an AT non-winning command capable of identifying the AT non-winning is output to the sub control board 73. The process for executing the result notification effect of displaying a message such as "Sorry!" Is included after the battle effect executed on the liquid crystal display 27 is completed. As a result, the player can be notified of the AT non-winning. Further, in the advantageous period setting process, it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied in CZ. When the AT is not won and the condition for terminating the CZ is satisfied, in the advantageous period setting process, the CZ flag is cleared and the advantageous period is terminated as shown in FIG. 8B to shift to the normal period. Even if the control is performed during the advantageous period, if the advantageous period ends without being controlled by the AT, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 does not light up, so that the advantageous period is not executed without performing the navigation effect. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even when the above is completed.

On the other hand, when it is decided to control the AT in the AT transition lottery during the CZ, the AT winning notification process for notifying the AT winning that the AT is controlled is performed, and the predetermined AT start timing (for example, next). It is controlled to AT from the game start timing). The AT winning notification process is, for example, a process of driving and controlling the notification display 60 or the like so as to display "77", or an AT winning command capable of identifying the AT winning is output to the sub control board 73 and displayed on a liquid crystal display. This includes a process for executing a result notification effect for displaying a message such as "AT winning" after the battle effect executed in the vessel 27 is completed. As a result, the AT winning can be notified to the player. The AT winning notification is performed when the number of CZ games has been exhausted. For this reason, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the AT has been won until the number of CZ games is exhausted. When the AT winning notification is performed, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned on.

Further, in the advantageous period setting process, when the AT winning notification is performed, the number of AT games determined in the AT transition lottery is set in the remaining AT game number counter, and the AT flag is set to control the AT. Further, in the advantageous period setting process, the advantageous period counter is added by 1 each time one game is executed. Further, in the advantageous period setting process, after the AT winning notification is performed, the remaining AT game number counter is subtracted by 1 every time one game is executed after the control to the AT is started.

In the advantageous period setting process during AT, when the predetermined additional lottery conditions (for example, when the "push order bell" is won, when the "one-card combination" is won, when the "bonus 1" or "bonus 2" is won, etc.) are satisfied. In addition, an additional lottery will be held to add to the number of AT games. Further, in the advantageous period setting process during AT, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, the AT flag is cleared and the advantageous period including AT is terminated and controlled to the normal period. The condition for ending the advantageous period during AT is, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, whether the remaining AT game number counter = 0, the advantageous period counter = 0, or the maximum number of cumulative numbers in the advantageous period. It is established when the current cumulative number from the base point exceeds 2400 with the lower price as the base point (0). When the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied during AT and the normal period is entered, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned off.

In the advantageous period setting process, as a result of being set by the game state setting process and the advantageous period setting process, which game state the next and subsequent games are in, the advantageous general (advantageous general game number counter) of the normal period and the advantageous period (Including the value of), CZ in the advantageous period (including the value of the CZ game number counter), AT in the advantageous period (including the value of the remaining AT game number counter), etc. Output possible status commands. As a result, on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute the effect according to the state from the next time onward. When the advantageous period setting process is completed, the process shifts to the bet number setting process of S100 to prepare for the next game. The slot machine 1 repeatedly executes the processes of S100 to S700 for each game. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not an error has occurred in the slot machine 1, and when it is determined that an error has occurred, outputs an error command capable of identifying the type of the error.

Here, among the advantageous period-related processes in S300 of FIG. 5, the process executed during AT will be described with reference to FIG. 9 and the like. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of the processing during AT that is executed during AT among the processing related to the advantageous period. When the AT flag is set, the main CPU 61 executes the AT-during process among the advantageous period-related processes.

In SA01, the value of the advantageous period counter is subtracted by 1. As described above, the advantageous period counter is a counter for specifying an upper limit period that can be controlled in a predetermined advantageous period. FIG. 9 shows the update processing of the advantageous period counter during the AT in which the AT flag is set, but only during the period from the start to the end of the advantageous period, that is, during the AT in which the AT flag is set. Instead, the value of the advantage period counter is set for each game even during the general advantage, during the CZ, during the RBB won during the advantage period, and during the period from the end of the RBB to the transition to the "advantage RT" again. The process for subtracting 1 is executed.

In SA02, the value of the remaining AT game number counter is subtracted by 1. The value of the remaining AT game number counter is decremented by 1 for each game during AT in which the AT flag is set, and "Advantage RT" is performed again after the RBB won during the advantageous period or the RBB won during AT is completed. Even if the game is played, it will not be updated until it is transferred to. Not limited to the subtractive method as shown in SA01 and SA02, for example, the remaining AT game number counter and the advantageous period counter are added by 1 for each game, and the count value is a predetermined value (the number of AT games acquired, It may be performed depending on whether or not 1500) has been reached (addition method).

In SA03, it is determined whether or not the predetermined additional lottery condition is satisfied. When it is not determined that the predetermined additional lottery conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to SA07. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined additional lottery conditions are satisfied, the additional lottery process is executed in SA04. The additional lottery process in SA04 is executed when the additional lottery condition is satisfied regardless of the value of the advantageous period counter updated in SA01 or SA02 or the value of the remaining AT game number counter. Therefore, even if the number of games in which the value of the remaining AT game counter is equal to or greater than the value of the advantageous period counter is added, it is not necessary to perform a judgment process such as whether or not a profit cannot be substantially granted. , When the additional lottery condition is satisfied, the additional lottery process is uniformly executed, so that it is possible to prevent the processing load from increasing.

The additional lottery process is performed with reference to the additional lottery table shown in FIG. The additional lottery table is stored in the ROM 67. The additional lottery table is set so that the additional lottery is performed according to the ratio according to the established additional lottery conditions. As additional lottery conditions, push order bell winning, one-card winning, and bonus winning are stipulated.

When the additional lottery conditions are met by winning the push order bell, the additional lottery will be rejected at a rate of 95%, but of the remaining 5%, any of "10", "20", "50", and "100" will be shown in FIG. It is determined by the number of additional games, which is the number of AT games to be added. When the additional lottery condition is satisfied by winning one card, the additional lottery condition is not won at a rate of 30%, but any of "10" to "150" is added at the rate shown in FIG. 10 out of the remaining 70%. Will be decided. In addition, when the additional lottery condition is satisfied by winning the bonus combination, the additional winning is always made, and any one of "10" to "150" is determined as the number of additional games at the ratio shown in FIG. In this way, the ratio of additional winnings and the ratio of determined to a large number of additional games differ depending on the type of additional lottery conditions that have been established. Therefore, the player should pay attention to which additional lottery conditions are satisfied. Can be done.

The additional lottery is performed collectively using the extracted values extracted for the winning combination lottery (batch lottery method). For example, regarding the judgment value for winning the "one-card combination", the judgment value is set so as to be the distribution rate corresponding to the "one-card combination winning" shown in FIG. 10, and which of the extracted values belongs to. An additional lottery will be held. The additional lottery is performed at the end of one game, but is not limited to this, and may be collectively performed at the time of the winning combination lottery in the internal lottery process. The additional lottery is not limited to the batch lottery method as long as it is performed according to the result of the combination lottery. For example, when a "one-card combination" is won in the combination lottery, a random number for the addition lottery is separately extracted. Therefore, an additional lottery may be performed using the random number.

Returning to FIG. 9, in SA05, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery was won. If it is not determined that the additional prize has been won, the process proceeds to SA07. On the other hand, when it is determined that the additional game has been won, the value of the number of additional games determined in the additional lottery is added to the value of the current remaining AT game number counter in SA06. As a result, the value of the remaining AT game number counter is increased by the number of additional games. In SA07, an additional game number command that can specify the number of added AT games is output and set. If it is not added, an additional game number command that can specify "0" is output and set.

In SA08, the remaining AT game number command, which is the value of the remaining AT game number counter and can specify the number of remaining AT games, is output and set. As a result of the additional lottery process in SA04, when the number of AT games is added in SA06, a command for the number of remaining AT games that can specify the number of remaining AT games after the addition is output and set. Further, in SA09, an output setting is set for the remaining upper limit game number command which is a value of the advantageous period counter and can specify the remaining upper limit game number up to the upper limit number of times of the advantageous period, and the process during AT ends. By outputting the command by SA08 and SA09, the number of remaining AT games during AT and the number of remaining games up to the upper limit of the advantageous period can be specified on the sub-control board 73 side. On the sub control board 73 side, a predetermined effect is executed based on a command output from the main control board 63 exemplified by SA07, SA08, SA09, and the like.

Next, among the advantageous period setting processes of S700 of FIG. 5, the process executed during the advantageous period will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of the cumulative number counter process for updating the cumulative number counter for specifying the cumulative number among the processes executed during the advantageous period in the advantageous period setting process. Further, FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of an end determination process for determining the end of the advantageous period among the processes executed during the advantageous period in the advantageous period setting process. The main CPU 61 executes the cumulative number counter process in the advantageous period setting process during the advantageous period, and executes the end determination process as the subsequent process.

In the cumulative number counter processing, first, in SA11, it is determined whether or not one of the re-game combinations has been won in the current game (the game ended this time). When it is determined that one of the replaying roles has been won, the process shifts to SA13. When it is determined that none of the re-game combinations has been won, the number of medals paid out (or credits have been added) in this game is added to the cumulative number counter in SA12. For example, when a small winning combination is won, the number of payouts corresponding to the small winning combination is added, and when the small winning combination is not won, the number of payouts is "0" and the addition is not updated. As a result, when the small role is not won in this game (including when the re-game role is won or the bonus role is won), the cumulative number counter is not updated, and when the small role is won, the small role is concerned. The number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is added and updated to the cumulative number counter.

In the SA13, it is determined whether or not one of the re-game combinations was won in the previous game (the game immediately before the game that ended this time). That is, it is determined whether or not the game this time is a game accompanying the winning of the re-game combination. When it is determined in the SA13 that the game was played by winning one of the re-games in the previous game, the process proceeds to the SA15. On the other hand, in SA13, none of the replaying roles was won in the previous game, and it is judged that this game is a game in which the number of bets is set using the medals (including credits) owned by the player. When this is done, the number of bets (number of inserted cards) set for this game is subtracted from the cumulative number counter in SA14. For example, when "3" is set as the bet number using medals or credits owned by the player and the current game is being played, "3" is subtracted from the value of the cumulative number counter. As a result, when this game is a game that accompanies a re-game winning combination, the cumulative number counter is not updated, and the number of bets is set by the insertion operation (maximum bet switch operation, medal insertion, etc.). When this happens, the number of bets is subtracted from the cumulative counter and updated.

Note that FIG. 11 shows an example in which the addition process in SA12 or the subtraction process in SA14 is not performed when the winning of the replaying combination is determined in SA11 and SA13. However, without performing SA11 and SA13, for example, when the player has won the replay combination in SA12 and SA14, the addition process of adding 0 or the subtraction process of subtracting 0 is performed (that is, the addition process or the subtraction process is performed). However, the value of the cumulative number counter may not be updated substantially). Even if the addition process in SA12 or the subtraction process in SA14 is not performed, the addition process for adding 0 or the subtraction process for subtracting 0 is performed when the player has won the re-game combination in SA12 and SA14. Even if there is, the determination process (determination of reaching the upper limit of the cumulative number) in SA22 of FIG. 12, which will be described later, is performed.

In SA15, it is determined whether or not the value of the cumulative number counter is 0 or less. When the value of the cumulative number counter is not determined to be 0 or less, the value of the cumulative number counter is a positive value and is not the lowest value at which the cumulative number at the present time in the advantageous period is the lowest. Ends counter processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the cumulative number counter is 0 or less, the value of the cumulative number counter is 0 or a negative value, and the current cumulative number is the lowest value in the current advantageous period. , SA16 clears the cumulative counter (set to 0). As a result, each time the cumulative number in the advantageous period reaches the lowest value, it is cleared to zero, and the number of medals increased from the current time can be specified from the subsequent cumulative number based on the cumulative number at that time. In SA15, it is not limited to determining whether or not the value of the cumulative number counter is 0 or less, and it is determined whether or not the value of the cumulative number counter is less than 0 (negative value). You may do so. Further, in SA17, the cumulative number command that can specify the value of the current cumulative number counter is output and set, and the cumulative number counter process is terminated. By outputting the cumulative number command, the cumulative number can be specified on the sub control board 73 side. On the sub-control board 73 side, a predetermined effect can be executed based on the specified cumulative number.

Next, the end determination process will be described. In the end determination process, first, it is determined in SA21 whether or not the value of the advantageous period counter is 0. As described in SA01 and the like in FIG. 9, the value of the advantageous period counter is subtracted by 1 each time the game is played in the advantageous period. In SA21, as a result of the subtraction, the value of the advantageous period becomes 0, and it is determined whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous period has been reached in this game, that is, the success or failure of the first condition among the conditions for ending the advantageous period. .. When it is determined in SA21 that the value of the advantageous period counter is 0, the process proceeds to SA26 because the first condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, when it is not determined in SA21 that the value of the advantageous period counter is 0, it is determined in SA22 whether or not the value of the cumulative number counter has reached 2400. The value of the cumulative number counter is updated in the cumulative number counter process shown in FIG. In SA22, as a result of the update, whether or not the value of the cumulative counter has reached 2400 and reached the upper limit of the advantageous period in this game, that is, the success or failure of the second condition of the conditions for ending the advantageous period. To judge. The second condition may be a condition that is satisfied when the value of the cumulative number counter exceeds 2400. In this case, the SA22 determines whether or not the value of the cumulative number counter is> 2400. You may try to do it. When it is determined in SA22 that the value of the cumulative number counter is 2400 or more, it means that the second condition is satisfied, so the process proceeds to SA26.

When it is not determined in SA22 that the value of the cumulative number counter is 2400 or more, it is determined in SA23 whether or not AT is in progress during the advantageous period. The determination of SA22 is executed even when, for example, SA12 and SA14 in FIG. 11 are not performed, that is, when it is determined as YES in SA11 or SA13 in FIG. Therefore, the processing can be standardized regardless of the winning of the replaying combination. When it is determined in SA23 that AT is in progress, it is determined in SA24 whether or not the value of the remaining AT game number counter is 0. As described in SA02 and the like in FIG. 9, the value of the remaining AT game number counter is decremented by 1 each time a game is played during AT. When it is determined in SA24 that the value of the remaining AT game number counter is 0, the process proceeds to SA26 because the fifth condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, when it is not determined in SA23 that AT is in progress, the third condition that can be satisfied in general advantage or the third condition that can be satisfied in CZ among the conditions for shifting to SA25 and ending the advantageous period. It is determined whether or not the condition of 4 is satisfied. When it is not determined in the SA25 that both the third condition and the fourth condition are satisfied, the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied, and the end determination process is terminated as it is. As a result, control to the advantageous period is continued.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA25 that any of the third condition and the fourth condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to SA26. In SA26, the advantageous period end process for terminating the advantageous period is performed to end the end determination process. In the advantageous period end processing, various counters related to the advantageous period (including advantageous period counter, cumulative number counter, etc.) and various flags (including AT flag, CZ flag, etc.) are updated according to the progress of the game during the advantageous period. At the same time, the game data used for the progress of the game is initialized. Further, in the advantageous period end processing, a command that can specify the game data immediately before the initialization is output and set. As a result, the advantageous period can be terminated, and it is possible to prevent the game data in the terminated advantageous period from being taken over by the game control by the main CPU 61 thereafter. Further, on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to specify data for various games during an advantageous period and reflect it in various effects.

<Direction control processing>
The sub CPU 71 executes the effect control program stored in the ROM 77 based on the command from the main control board 63, and performs the effect lottery to determine the presence / absence and type of the effect execution by the random number lottery according to the progress of the game. Based on the lottery result, the effect control process for driving and controlling the effect means such as the liquid crystal display 27, the speakers 31L and 31R, and various lamps / LEDs connected to the sub control board 73 is performed. An example of the effect executed by the effect control process will be described below.

(Direction about the winning group)
In the effect control process, when a winning type command that can specify the type of the winning combination group won in the combination lottery is received, the effect according to the type of the winning combination group can be executed. The effect control process is based on the reception of the winning type command, for example, when the winning type command of "RBB" is received, a confirmation screen including "bonus confirmation!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, or " Based on the winning type command that can specify the "pushing order bell", an effect of displaying an image of a "yellow balloon" having a color similar to that of the bell on the liquid crystal display 27 is executed. As a result, the player can proceed with the game while guessing the winning combination group, and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the effect control process, when an advantageous operation mode command capable of specifying an advantageous operation mode is received during AT, an effect of displaying an image capable of specifying the advantageous operation mode specified from the command on the liquid crystal display 27 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. Execute. As a result, when any of "Left Correct Answer Bell 1" to "Right Correct Answer Bell 4" is won during AT, the stop operation is performed according to the correct answer procedure, and "BEL" can be reliably won. In addition, during ART, which is "advantageous RT" and AT, "BEL" can be won even when any of "Left correct answer bell 1" to "Right correct answer bell 4" is won. It is possible to surely prevent the eyes from stopping and falling to "normal RT". An image capable of specifying an advantageous operation mode is also referred to as a navigation effect.

(Direction related to various conditions)
As described above, in the advantageous period-related processing of S300, the predetermined advantageous period transition condition, the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, the predetermined AT transition lottery condition, the predetermined additional lottery condition, and the condition for ending the advantageous period are satisfied. The condition-related command is output to the sub-control board 73 when the situation is obtained.

In the effect control process, it is possible to execute a chance button effect, a continuous effect, or the like when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined conditions are, for example, that the CZ transition lottery condition is satisfied, the AT transition lottery condition is satisfied, the additional lottery condition is satisfied, and a bonus or a single winning combination is won. Is granted (control to CZ or AT, additional control, control to bonus, etc.).

The chance button effect is an effect of displaying a message image such as "PUSH" for prompting the operation of the decision switch 81a or an image imitating the decision switch 81a on the liquid crystal display 27 or the like. As the chance button effect pattern, a normal pattern in which a message image such as "PUSH" is displayed in a normal mode (for example, white) and a special pattern in which a message image such as "PUSH" is displayed in a special mode (for example, with diagonal lines) are displayed. And include.

In the effect control process, the operation-corresponding effect is executed by operating the determination switch 81a during the chance button effect. The operation-compatible production includes, for example, a winning notification effect that notifies whether or not a CZ, AT, or bonus has been won (whether or not a privilege is granted), and a CZ, AT, or bonus. Includes a winning suggestion effect that suggests the possibility (the possibility that a privilege will be given). It should be noted that the winning suggestion effect is not limited to this as long as it does not notify whether or not the player has won (whether or not the privilege is granted), and the player has a sense of expectation for winning. It may be a production that incites. In addition, the continuous effect is whether or not a CZ, AT, bonus, etc. is won as a result of the effect after executing a predetermined effect over a plurality of games (whether or not a privilege is given). It is a production to notify. The chance button effect can be executed according to the progress of the effect during the continuous effect, and can also be executed independently (separately from the continuous effect).

In the effect control process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery for whether or not to execute the chance button effect and a lottery for whether or not to execute the continuous effect are performed. When it is decided to execute the chance button effect, the pattern of the chance button effect to be executed is determined. When it is decided to execute the continuous effect, the pattern of the continuous effect to be executed is determined. When it is decided to execute the chance button effect and the continuous effect, the pattern of the continuous effect to be executed is determined from the patterns incorporating the chance button effect during the continuous effect.

The chance button effect is an effect that encourages the operation of the decision switch 81a as described above. For this reason, for example, if the chance button effect is executed between the first stop operation and the subsequent stop operations, the stop operation with good rhythm is hindered, and the flow of the game is divided. There is a risk that it will end up. In addition, if the number of bets is set but the start operation has not yet been performed and the chance button effect is executed while the game start is not confirmed, the player decides whether or not the chance button effect is executed. It becomes recognizable and may be used to determine whether or not to start the game. In order not to cause such a problem, in the present embodiment, the timing for starting the chance button effect is limited to a predetermined timing during the game.

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the chance button effect can be started. In FIG. 13, after the number of bets is set by inserting medals or operating the bet switch, the start switch 19 is operated to start the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R, and the reels 11L to 21R are operated in response to the operation of the stop switches 21L to 21R. Depending on the progress of the game until the rotation of each of the 11Rs is stopped, it is indicated whether the chance button effect can be started or cannot be started.

In FIG. 13, the Nth game and the N + 1th game are shown in the number of games column, and the period from when the bet number is set to when the start switch 19 is operated is “BET” for each game. The period from when the start switch 19 is operated (ON detection) to start the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R until the first stop operation is detected as ON is indicated as "START", and the first stop operation is turned ON. The period during which the detection is performed is indicated as "1ST" and "ON", the period during which the detection is turned OFF after the first stop operation is detected to be ON is indicated as "1ST" and "OFF", and the second stop operation and Each of the third stop operations is shown in the same manner as the first stop operation.

In such a flow of games, as a period during which the chance button effect can be started, as illustrated in correspondence with the flow of the number of games "N", the period indicated as "START" and the third stop operation are ON. The period from the detection to the setting of the bet number is defined. On the other hand, as the period during which the chance button effect cannot be started, a period indicated as "BET" and a period from the detection of the first stop operation to ON detection of the third stop operation are defined. .. As shown in Examples 1 and 2 of FIG. 13, the chance button effect is started in the period indicated as "START" and in the period from the detection of the third stop operation to ON until the bet number is set. Once started, it can be continuously executed even at the timing after the lapse of the period. As a result, as shown in the flow of the number of games "N + 1", when the chance button effect is started in the period indicated by, for example, "START", it is continuously executed even after the first stop operation is detected to be ON. To. On the other hand, as shown in Examples 3 and 4 of FIG. 13, the chance button effect includes a period indicated by “BET” and a period from when the first stop operation is detected to ON and when the third stop operation is detected as ON. It becomes impossible to start at.

Next, a specific example of the chance button effect will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a display example of the liquid crystal display 27 when the chance button effect is executed. FIG. 14 shows a display example when the CZ transition lottery condition is satisfied in the advantageous general during the advantageous period. In FIG. 14, a display example of the liquid crystal display 27 will be mainly described, but in the chance button effect, various lamps are controlled in a manner corresponding to the display on the liquid crystal display 27, and a predetermined sound effect or BGM is a speaker. It is assumed that the output is from 31L and 31R. In the following description, an example in which the chance button effect is started when the start switch 19 is operated to detect ON or the third stop operation is detected to be ON will be described. However, as described above, the chance button The production is not limited to this as long as it is started in the period indicated as "START" or in the period from the detection of the third stop operation to ON until the bet number is set.

In the advantageous general period of the advantageous period, as shown in FIG. 14A, a background image reminiscent of the daytime is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. A message such as "daytime stage" is displayed in the upper left region of the liquid crystal display 27, and a character A reminiscent of a frog is displayed in the lower left region while taking a walk.

FIG. 14B shows a display example when the chance button effect of the normal pattern is executed when the start switch 19 is operated (ON detection) in response to the establishment of the CZ transition lottery condition. Since the start switch 19 is detected to be ON, the chance button effect can be started even until the start switch 19 is detected to be OFF. The chance button effect is executed by displaying a message image such as "PUSH" or an image imitating the determination switch 81a in the central region of the liquid crystal display 27 in a layer having a higher priority than the background image.

FIG. 14C shows a display example when the operation-corresponding effect is executed in response to the operation of the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 during the chance button effect. FIG. 14C shows a display example when the winning suggestion effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect. The winning suggestion effect as the operation-compatible effect is executed by cutting in the image of the character B together with a message such as "CHANGE" in the central region of the liquid crystal display 27 in a layer having a higher priority than the background image. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the CZ, AT, bonus, etc. have been won (the privilege may be given).

FIG. 14 (d) shows an example in which a background image reminiscent of daytime is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 in the advantageous general period during the advantageous period, as in FIG. 14 (a). FIG. 14E shows a display example when a special pattern chance button effect is executed when the third stop operation is detected to be ON in response to the establishment of the CZ transition lottery condition. Since the third stop operation is detected to be ON, the chance button effect can be started even until the third stop operation is detected to be OFF. The chance button effect of the special pattern is also executed in the layer having a higher priority than the background image.

FIG. 14 (f) shows a display example when the operation-corresponding effect is executed in response to the operation of the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 during the chance button effect. FIG. 14 (f) shows a display example when the winning notification effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect. The winning notification effect as an operation-compatible effect is executed by cutting in a message such as "WIN Congratulations" in the central region of the liquid crystal display 27 in a layer having a higher priority than the background image. As a result, it is possible to definitively notify the player that the CZ, AT, bonus, etc. have been won (the privilege is given).

In the effect control process, as shown in FIGS. 14 (b) and 14 (e), when the chance button effect is executed, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the decision switch 81a for which the operation is prompted is turned on. Do. At this time, regardless of the controlled mode, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the determination switch 81a is controlled with a predetermined power consumption. That is, even when the eco mode is controlled, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the determination switch 81a is controlled with the same power consumption as in the normal state. Therefore, regardless of the controlled mode, the operation unit of the determination switch 81a can be lit with high brightness, and the operation target can be made conspicuous.

The chance button effect is displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in FIGS. 14 (b) and 14 (e). On the other hand, the effect displayed in the standby state and for guiding to the player menu is a smaller image than the chance button effect shown in FIGS. 14 (b) and 14 (e). Therefore, it is displayed in the display area near the edge of the liquid crystal display 27. FIG. 14 (g) shows a display example when the guidance effect is executed on the demo screen displayed in the standby state. In FIG. 14 (g), the guidance effect is executed with an image smaller than the image of the chance button effect in the display area near the lower left of the liquid crystal display 27. Further, on the right side of the guidance effect, for example, a message image such as "menu display by operating the decision switch" is displayed, and the function of the guidance effect is explained.

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a table referred to when drawing a pattern of chance button effect. In the effect control process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and it is determined that the chance button effect is to be executed, a lottery process for drawing a pattern of the chance button effect to be executed is executed. In the lottery process for drawing the pattern of the chance button effect, when the CZ transition lottery, the AT transition lottery, and the additional lottery are each won or the bonus is won (when the privilege is given), FIG. With reference to the winning table shown in (a), when the CZ transition lottery, the AT transition lottery, and the additional lottery have not been won and the bonus has not been won (when the privilege is not given), FIG. Refer to the non-winning table shown in (b).

The patterns of the chance button effect include winning patterns 1 to 8 (FIG. 15 (a)) selected when the privilege is given, and non-winning patterns 1 to 8 (FIG. 15) selected when the privilege is not given. (B)) and are included. Further, the pattern of the chance button effect includes a normal pattern (patterns 1 to 4) as a normal mode and a special pattern (patterns 5 to 8) as a special mode as shown in FIG. Further, in the pattern of the chance button effect, a pattern (patterns 3, 4, 7, 8) in which the winning notification effect is performed as an operation corresponding effect executed in response to the operation of the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81. And patterns (patterns 1, 2, 5, and 6) for producing a winning suggestion effect are included. Further, the patterns of the chance button effect include a pattern (patterns 1, 3, 5, 7) for starting the chance button effect when the start switch 19 is detected to be ON, and a pattern (patterns 1, 3, 5, 7) when the third stop operation is detected to be ON. A pattern (patterns 2, 4, 6, 8) for starting the chance button effect is included.

For example, when the winning pattern 1 is determined, the chance button effect in the normal mode is started when the start ON is detected, and the winning suggestion effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect. Further, when the winning pattern 8 is determined, the chance button effect of the special mode is started when the third stop operation ON is detected, and the winning notification effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect. Further, when the non-winning pattern 3 is determined, the chance button effect in the normal mode is started when the start ON is detected, and the winning suggestion effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect. Further, when the non-winning pattern 7 is determined, the chance button effect of the special mode is started when the start operation ON is detected, and the winning notification effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect.

In the lottery process referring to the winning table shown in FIG. 15A and the non-winning table shown in FIG. 15B, any of the lottery processes will be performed according to the fractions shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B. It is decided by the pattern. Therefore, it can be said that the following advantageous effects are obtained.

First, when a privilege is given such as when a CZ transition lottery, an AT transition lottery, and an additional lottery are won, or when a bonus is won (the winning table in FIG. 15A), the CZ A special pattern is determined as a mode of the chance button effect at a higher rate than when no privilege is given because the player has not won in the transition lottery or the like (table at the time of non-winning in FIG. 15B). Therefore, when the chance button effect is started in a special mode, the expectation that the privilege is given can be improved.

Further, the rate at which the winning notification effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect is the start timing of the chance button effect when the third stop operation ON is detected rather than the pattern when the start ON is detected (for example, the winning pattern 3). The pattern (for example, winning pattern 4) is higher. For this reason, when the chance button effect is started when the third stop operation ON is detected, the expectation that the winning notification effect is executed as the operation response effect is raised more than when the chance button effect is started when the start ON is detected. Can be done. In addition, when the start ON is detected, the expectation that the privilege is given is raised, and it becomes easier to maintain the expectation that the privilege is given until the third stop operation ON is detected, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved.

Further, the ratio at which the chance button effect of the pattern of executing the winning suggestion effect as the operation corresponding effect is started when the start ON is detected (for example, the distribution rate of the winning pattern 1) is the pattern of executing the winning notification effect as the operation corresponding effect. The chance button effect of is set to be higher than the rate (for example, the distribution rate of the winning pattern 4) that is started when the third stop operation ON is detected. For this reason, it is possible to provide many opportunities to raise the sense of expectation by starting the chance button effect of the pattern of executing the winning suggestion effect when the start ON is detected, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the chance button effect in the special aspect is the total distribution of the winning patterns 6 and 8 when the third stop operation ON is detected (for example, the total distribution of the winning patterns 6 and 8) rather than when the start ON is detected (for example, the total distribution rate of the winning patterns 5 and 7). Rate) is high. On the other hand, the chance button effect in the normal mode is more when the start ON is detected (for example, the total distribution of the winning patterns 1 and 3) than when the third stop operation ON is detected (for example, the total distribution rate of the winning patterns 2 and 4). Rate) is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation that the chance button effect is started in a special mode at the time of detecting the third stop operation ON, which is the timing after the start ON detection.

In FIGS. 13 to 15, an example in which the chance button effect is executed independently has been described. However, when it is determined to execute the chance button effect and the continuous effect as described above, the pattern of the continuous effect to be executed is determined from the patterns incorporating the chance button effect during the continuous effect. Even in the continuous production pattern in which the chance button effect is included, the chance button effect is the period from the start ON detection to the first stop operation ON detection and the third stop operation as illustrated in FIG. It is included so that it will be executed during the period from the time when ON is detected to the setting of the number of bets. For example, the chance button effect is included in the continuous effect so that it is started by the start ON detection or the third stop operation ON detection. Further, the appearance rate of the chance button effect during the continuous effect is included in the continuous effect so as to exert the advantageous effect shown in FIG. The image corresponding to the chance button effect during the continuous effect is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the background image and a layer having a higher priority than the continuous effect.

With reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, a display example and display timing on the liquid crystal display 27 when a continuous effect of a pattern incorporating a chance button effect is executed will be specifically described. 16 and 17, a display example of the liquid crystal display 27 will be mainly described, but during the continuous production, various lamps are controlled in a manner corresponding to the display on the liquid crystal display 27, and a predetermined sound effect is produced. And BGM are output from the speakers 31L and 31R.

FIG. 16 shows a chance button effect corresponding to the winning pattern 1 or the non-winning pattern 1 when the start ON is detected in the third game among the continuous effects executed over the three games (three games). A diagram for explaining a display example of a continuous effect defined to execute a chance button effect corresponding to the winning pattern 4 or the non-winning pattern 4 when the third stop operation ON is detected in the third game. Is. The "1G", "2G", and "3G" in FIG. 16 correspond to the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd games, and the circled numbers "1", "2", etc. that follow correspond to the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd games. It is assumed that it corresponds to the timing in the game.

The continuous production starts when the 1G bet number is set. In the 1st G, the title of the continuous production is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16A, a character A imitating a frog is displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 27, and above the character A, as an achievement condition, "Let the stars shine with force!" A message is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that an effect having a story development relating to whether or not the star can be made to shine is executed. In addition, below the achievement conditions, it is shown that the expected value of the continuous production to be started is two stars, and below the character A, a message to liven up the production such as "Ikke!" (Line) is displayed. The effect shown in FIG. 16A is performed after the third stop operation in the 1G is performed until the bet number in the 2G is set.

When the number of bets for the second G is set, the effect is switched to the effect shown in FIG. 16B. As shown in FIG. 16B, four star frames are displayed above the character A. Subsequently, when the start switch 19 is operated in the 2nd G, the two star frames from the left vibrate vertically and horizontally as shown in FIG. 16 (c), and when a predetermined time elapses, FIG. 16 (d) As shown in, the production of two stars shining is performed. Further, in FIG. 16D, it is notified that the production continues in the subsequent games by displaying "NEXT". In the effects shown in FIGS. 16 (c) to 16 (d), the number of bets in the 3G is set after the start switch 19 is operated in the 2G and the third stop operation is performed in the 2G. Will be done.

When the 3G bet number is set, the effect is switched to the effect shown in FIG. 16 (e). As shown in FIG. 16 (e), one of the remaining two star frames vibrates vertically and horizontally. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation that one of the remaining two star frames will shine and improve the interest of the game. The effect shown in FIG. 16E is performed from the setting of the bet number of the 3Gth to the ON detection of the start operation in the 3Gth.

When the start operation is detected to be ON in the 3G, as shown in FIG. 16F, one of the remaining two star frames shines and the chance button effect is started. FIG. 16 (g) shows a display example in which the determination switch 81a is operated in response to the chance button effect, and the winning suggestion effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect. In FIG. 16 (g), a message such as "chance" is cut-in displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 27 as a winning suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the expectation that the privilege will be given.

FIG. 16H shows a display example when the first stop operation is detected to be ON in the 3Gth stage. The remaining one star frame vibrates up, down, left and right, and a message such as "OK!" Is displayed. The effect of the remaining one star frame vibrating up, down, left, and right may be started when the first stop operation is detected to be ON in the 3Gth, and is determined according to the chance button effect. It may be started by operating the switch 81a.

FIG. 16I shows a display example when the third stop operation is detected to be ON in the 3Gth. As shown in FIG. 16 (i), the effect that the remaining one star frame vibrates up, down, left and right continues, and when the third stop operation is detected to be ON in the 3G, the chance button effect is started. .. By operating the determination switch 81a in the display state of FIG. 16 (i), when the privilege is not given (when not winning), it is switched to the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 16 (j). As shown in Fig. 16 (j), the remaining one star does not shine, and messages such as "Sorry" and "Is this so far ..." are displayed and character A is turned backwards, which is non-existent. A production will be performed to notify the outcome corresponding to the winning. The effect shown in FIG. 16 (j) is performed until the bet number of the next game (4th G) is set. When the number of bets on the 4th G is set, the screen shifts to the state in which the continuous effect is not executed.

On the other hand, when the determination switch 81a is operated in the display state of FIG. 16 (i) and the privilege is given (at the time of winning), it is switched to the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 16 (k). .. FIG. 16 illustrates a case where RBB1 is won as a privilege. As the winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 16 (k), the remaining one star shines and a message such as "OK!" Is displayed (winning suggestion effect), and then as shown in FIG. 16 (m). By displaying a message such as "success" or "done!", After the effect of notifying the outcome corresponding to the bonus winning is performed, the screen shifts to the bonus confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 16 (n). On the bonus confirmation screen, a message such as "bonus confirmation" is displayed in the upper area of the liquid crystal display 27, and a plurality of characters are displayed in the lower area of the liquid crystal display 27. The bonus confirmation screen shown in FIG. 16N may be performed in association with the next game (4th G). The bonus confirmation screen may be performed, for example, when the number of bets for the 4Gth is set, or when the start switch 19 for starting the reel rotation in the 4Gth is operated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, among the continuous effects executed over two games (two games), when the start ON is detected in the second game, it corresponds to the winning pattern 1 or the non-winning pattern 1. A display example of a continuous effect defined to execute a chance button effect to be executed and to execute a chance button effect corresponding to the winning pattern 8 or the non-winning pattern 8 when the third stop operation ON is detected in the second game. To explain.

The continuous production starts when the 1G bet number is set. When the 1G bet number is set, the effects shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (h) are started. As shown in FIG. 17A, a message such as "Win the competition!" Is displayed in the upper region of the liquid crystal display 27 as an achievement condition, and below that, the rival character C (in FIG. 17A). It is displayed that the character arranged on the upper side and the character A on the player side (the character arranged on the lower side in FIG. 17A) are located at the start line of the track, and a predetermined time has elapsed. At that time, as shown in FIG. 17B, the message "Win the competition against Kogaeru!" Is displayed as additional information on the achievement conditions. Further, when the predetermined time elapses, messages such as "OK" and "Start" are displayed as shown in FIGS. 17C and 17D. After that, the effect is switched to the effects shown in FIGS. 17 (e) to 17 (h). As shown in FIGS. 17 (e) to 17 (h), a state in which the characters A and C jump to the right while competing with each other is displayed. The effects shown in FIGS. 17 (e) to 17 (h) are performed after the third stop operation in the 1G is performed until the start operation in the 2G is detected.

When the 2G start operation is detected to be ON, as shown in FIG. 17 (i), a goal is displayed, a message such as "It's almost a goal!" Is displayed, and a chance button effect is started. To. FIG. 17 (j) shows a display example in which the determination switch 81a is operated in response to the chance button effect, and the winning suggestion effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect. In FIG. 17 (j), a message such as "maybe a chance ?!" is cut-in displayed in the central region of the liquid crystal display 27 as a winning suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the expectation that the privilege will be given.

After that, as shown in FIG. 17 (k), the state of the final stage in which the characters A and C compete with each other is displayed. FIG. 17 (m) shows a display example when the second stop operation of the second G is detected to be ON. As shown in FIG. 17 (m), the appearance of the final stage in which the characters A and C compete with each other is continued, and when the third stop operation is detected to be ON in the 2G, the chance button effect of the special mode is started.

By operating the determination switch 81a in the display state of FIG. 17 (m), when the privilege is given (at the time of winning), it is switched to the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 17 (n). FIG. 17 illustrates a case where the AT is won as a privilege. As the result notification effect, as shown in FIG. 17 (n), a state in which the character A finishes before the character C is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 17 (o), it is displayed that character A is pleased while character C is sitting backwards, and messages such as "victory!" And "done!" Are displayed. Is displayed. Then, when the 3G bet number is set, the continuous production is ended and the screen shifts to the AT rush screen.

On the other hand, by operating the determination switch 81a in the display state of FIG. 17 (m), when the special privilege is not given (when not winning), it is switched to the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 17 (p). .. As the result notification effect, as shown in FIG. 17 (p), the appearance of the character C reaching the goal before the character A is displayed. After that, in FIG. 17 (q), it is displayed that the character A is sitting backward while the character C is pleased. Then, when the number of bets for the third G is set, the screen shifts to the state in which the continuous effect is not executed.

Here, in the example of the continuous production in FIGS. 16 and 17, as illustrated in FIGS. 16 (j) and (k) and 17 (n) and (p), it corresponds to the notification of winning in the continuous production. An example of executing the winning notification effect by switching to the effect part has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the decision switch 81a is operated in response to the chance button effect shown in FIGS. 16 (i) and 17 (m), the winning notification effect is executed as an effect separate from the continuous effect, and then the continuous effect is performed. It may be switched to the rest of. Specifically, the final cut-in may be displayed as a winning notification effect, and if it is a winning, a character such as "VICTORY !!" is displayed as a cut-in, and if it is not a winning. May cut in and display characters such as "It's a little more ...!".

Further, in the effect control process, the background screen during AT is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 during AT. On the background screen during AT, the number of remaining AT games and the net increase number during the AT are displayed. The number of remaining AT games refers to the value of the number of remaining AT games counter for specifying the number of games notified that the AT can be controlled. The net increase number refers to the number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of medals used for setting the number of medals from the number of medals actually given in the predetermined net increase number calculation period. The net increase number calculation period is the period from the start of ART controlled by AT and controlled by advantageous RT to the end of the advantageous period (including CZ and AT) until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Say. In the following, processing and display examples related to the net increase number display will be described.

(About net increase number display related)
The effect control process includes the processes shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 as the net increase number display process for displaying the net increase number during AT. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for explaining a net increase number display process executed when one game is started after the number of bets is set (including BET and automatic BET by winning a re-game combination). FIG. 19 is a flowchart for explaining a net increase number display process executed when a medal is awarded. When the sub CPU 71 receives the bet command, it executes the net increase number display process of FIG. 18, and when it receives the payout command, it executes the net increase number display process of FIG. In the following, the net increase number display process will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19.

First, in SB01, it is determined whether or not it is the net increase number calculation period. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a period from the start of ART controlled by AT and controlled by advantageous RT until the condition shown in FIG. 8B is satisfied and the advantageous period ends. Once controlled by ART, the net increase number calculation period does not end due to, for example, RBB winning or RBB control, and continues until the condition shown in FIG. 8B is satisfied and controlled during the normal period. Whether or not it is the net increase number calculation period is specified based on, for example, a command output from the main CPU 61.

When it is not determined in SB01 that the net increase number calculation period is reached, the net increase number display process is terminated as it is without displaying the net increase number. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB01 that the net increase number is calculated, it is determined in SB02 whether or not one of the re-games has been won in the previous game (the game immediately before the game ended this time). When it is determined in SB02 that the game was played by winning one of the re-games in the previous game, the game proceeds to SB04. On the other hand, in SB02, none of the re-gaming roles was won in the previous game, and it is judged that this game is a game in which the number of bets is set using the medals (including credits) owned by the player. When this is done, the number of bets (that is, the number of bets) is subtracted from the net increase in the number of sheets in SB03. The net increase number is stored updatable in a predetermined area of the RAM 75. The bet number is specified based on the bet command output from the main CPU 61.

In SB04, it is determined whether or not the confirmation screen is being displayed or the end telop is being displayed (the end telop flag is being set). The confirmation screen is a screen for notifying that either RBB1 or RBB2 has been won, and refers to a screen for displaying a message such as "bonus confirmed!" On the liquid crystal display 27, for example. When the sub CPU 71 receives a winning type command that can identify that the player has won the "RBB", the sub CPU 71 determines how many times the game is digested before displaying the confirmation screen (display timing determination), and reaches the timing. When you do, the confirmation screen is displayed.

In addition, the end telop display means that the cumulative number specified from the cumulative number command reaches the predetermined cumulative number (for example, 2370) that is less than the predetermined number (for example, 30) up to 2400, which is the upper limit, or the advantageous period counter is the upper limit. By reaching the numerical value (for example, 5) immediately before (0. Soon 1500 times of the game is digested), the first condition or the second condition of the conditions for ending the advantageous period soon is satisfied. It is a display to notify. The end telop display displays a message on the liquid crystal display 27 according to a condition that will soon be satisfied. The sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the timing to display the end telop based on the command for specifying the value of the cumulative number counter or the advantageous period counter, and displays the end telop when the timing is reached.

When the confirmation screen or the end telop is displayed during AT, the display of the net increase number is temporarily terminated. When the confirmation screen is displayed, the display of the number of remaining AT games is temporarily stopped, and the subtraction of the number of remaining AT games is also temporarily stopped. After the confirmation screen is displayed, the display of the net increase number is resumed when controlled by RBB, and it is said that AT is in progress even during the preparation period such as initial RT and normal RT until it is controlled to advantageous RT after the end of RBB. Therefore, it is updated and displayed. On the other hand, the number of remaining AT games is displayed even during the preparation period after the end of RBB, but the subtraction update display is not performed. Further, the display portion of the net increase number of sheets and the number may be grayed out, or the notation such as "HOLD" may be superimposed on the display portion of the net increase number of sheets so that the player can identify that the subtraction update display is not performed. During the preparation period, the probability of winning the re-game combination is lower than when it is an advantageous RT, and the number of medals owned by the player decreases, so the number of AT games is not subtracted. Because there is. The subtraction display of the number of remaining AT games will be restarted after being controlled by the advantageous RT (ART) after the preparation period has elapsed. The display of the end telop ends when the end telop flag is cleared when the advantage period ends when the cumulative number reaches 2400, which is the upper limit, or when the advantage period counter reaches 0, which is the upper limit. When the display of the end telop is terminated and the RBB started during the advantageous period is continuously controlled, the net increase in the number of sheets in the RBB is continuously displayed.

Returning to FIG. 18, when it is not determined in SB04 that the confirmation screen is being displayed or the end telop is being displayed (when neither is displayed), in SB05, the current state is either AT or RBB. Whether or not it is determined. It should be noted that the AT includes not only the ART but also the AT + ready state after the ART is once started. When it is determined in SB05 that the current AT or bonus is in progress, the net increase number display on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated in SB03 to the net increase number after subtraction in SB06.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SB04 that the confirmation screen is being displayed or the end telop is being displayed, or when it is determined in SB05 that neither AT nor RBB is being displayed, the net increase number display is hidden in SB07. That is, it is controlled so that the net increase number is not displayed. As a result, the net increase number is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the net increase number calculation period, neither the confirmation screen nor the end telop based on the cumulative number is displayed, and during AT or RBB. ..

Next, the net increase number display process of FIG. 19 will be described. In SB08, it is determined whether or not it is the net increase number calculation period, and when it is determined that it is not the net increase number calculation period, the net increase number display process is terminated as it is without displaying the net increase number. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB08 that it is the period for calculating the net increase number, it is determined in SB09 whether or not one of the re-game combinations has been won in the current game (the game ended this time). When it is determined that one of the replaying roles has been won, the process proceeds to SB11. When it is determined that none of the replaying roles has been won, the number of payouts is added to the net increase in SB10. The number of payouts is specified based on the payout command output from the main CPU 61. The net increase number in the net increase number calculation period is calculated by SB03 of FIG. 18 and SB10 of FIG.

In SB11, it is determined whether or not the end telop flag is set. The end telop flag is a flag for displaying the end telop, and is set in SB13. When it is determined in SB11 that the end telop flag is set, since the end telop flag has already been set, the net increase number display process is terminated without determining the cumulative number. When the end telop flag is set, the chance button effect may not be executed even at the timing of executing the chance button effect, and the end telop flag may be executed in the game in which the chance button effect is executed. When there is a possibility that is set (when the cumulative number is, for example, a value at which the end telop flag can be set when the maximum number of payouts for one game is added), the chance button effect is not executed. You may.

On the other hand, when it is not determined in SB11 that the end telop flag is set, it is determined in SB12 whether or not the cumulative number has reached 2370. The cumulative number is specified based on the cumulative number command from the main CPU 61. In SB12, it may be determined whether or not the cumulative number exceeds 2370 (cumulative number> 2370?). In SB12, the determination is made based on the same numerical value (that is, 2370) regardless of whether the RBB is in the RBB internal winning state or the RBB is in the RBB during AT. When it is determined in SB12 that the cumulative number has reached 2370, the process shifts to SB13.

In SB13, the end telop flag for displaying the corresponding end telop is set. As the end telop when it is determined that the cumulative number has reached 2370, a message such as "Soon, the upper limit of the advantageous period of 2400 sheets will be reached" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. In addition, the display of the end telop continues regardless of the cumulative number thereafter (for example, whether or not it is less than 2370) until the end telop flag is cleared at the end of the advantageous period, and the advantageous period is extended. The display ends when it is finished. Even when the end telop flag is set, the end telop is not displayed during the RBB because the effect corresponding to the RBB and the display of the net increase number of sheets are performed. Further, the display mode of the end telop as a specific effect is not limited to such a telop display, and the message may be displayed in subtitles (or scroll display), and the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 27 is used. It may be displayed as. In the present embodiment, the end telop is displayed when it is determined in SB12 that the cumulative number has reached 2370.

In SB14, when the end telop is displayed when the cumulative number reaches 2370, the display of the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period is hidden and the net increase number display process is terminated. As a result, during the end telop display when the cumulative number reaches 2370, the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period is controlled so as not to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper limit of the cumulative number of 2400 or more (the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400) to be displayed as the net increase. It can be said that the process for hiding the net increase number in the present embodiment is executed when it is determined in SB12 that the cumulative number has reached 2370, and the end telop flag is set in SB13. It can also be said that it is executed when it is set and the end telop is displayed.

In FIG. 19, the sub CPU 71 determines the cumulative number (SB12), and when it determines that the cumulative number has reached 2370, SB13 and SB14 are performed to display the end telop and calculate the net increase number. A display control command for instructing that the net increase in the number of sheets is not displayed during the period is output to the liquid crystal display 27, and the display control unit of the liquid crystal display 27 displays the end telop based on the display control command. In addition, an example of hiding the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period was explained. However, for example, the sub CPU 71 outputs only the display control command for instructing the display of the end telop to the liquid crystal display 27 by performing SB13, so that the liquid crystal display is based on the display control command. The display control unit of 27 displays the end telop and hides the net increase during the net increase calculation period in accordance with the display of the end telop (when it is determined that the end telop is to be displayed). You may do so.

When it returns to SB12 and it is not determined that the cumulative number has reached 2370, it shifts to SB15. In SB15, it is determined whether or not the confirmation screen is being displayed. When it is not determined in SB15 that the confirmation screen is being displayed, it is determined in SB16 whether or not the current state is AT or RBB. It should be noted that the AT includes not only the ART but also the AT + ready state after the ART is once started. When it is determined in SB16 that the current number is in AT or RBB, it is determined in SB17 whether or not the net increase number has reached the set OVER display number.

FIG. 20A is a diagram for explaining the number of OVER displays and the display mode of the OVER display. The OVER display number means a value determined stepwise for every 500 sheets such as 500, 1000, 1500, 2000. During AT or bonus, the next OVER display number to be aimed at among the OVER display numbers shown in FIG. 20 is set according to the net increase number calculated by SB03 in FIG. 18 and SB10 in FIG. For example, when the net increase number has not reached 500, "500" is set as the OVER display number, and when the net increase has reached 500 but has not reached 1000, "1000" is set as the OVER display number. To. The OVER display number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 75, "500" is set as an initial value, and thereafter, a value of the next stage is set in SB21 described later.

Returning to FIG. 19, when it is not determined in SB17 that the net increase number has reached the set OVER display number, in SB22, the net increase number display on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increase number after addition in SB10. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB17 that the net increase number has reached the set OVER display number, the corresponding OVER display execution flag is set in SB18. The OVER display is a display for notifying that the calculated net increase number has reached the set OVER display number. When the execution flag is set, the sub CPU 71 performs a process for executing the OVER display on the liquid crystal display 27. As shown in the display mode column of FIG. 20A, the display data of the normal mode (red characters, etc.) is stored up to "1500" in the ROM 77 as the display data of the OVER display. The display data of the rainbow mode (characters of the rainbow pattern, etc.) is stored in "2000", which is a predetermined base. Therefore, the OVER display up to "1500" is displayed in the normal mode, and the OVER display of "2000" is displayed in the rainbow mode. Even when it is determined in SB17 that the net increase number has reached the set OVER display number, when the chance button effect is being executed, the game does not shift to SB18 and the corresponding OVER display is displayed. You may not set the execution flag of. In this case, when it is determined that the net increase number has reached the set OVER display number in the subsequent SB17, and the chance button effect is not executed, the screen is shifted to SB18 and the OVER display is executed. It may be done.

In SB19, it is determined whether or not the reached OVER display number is the OVER display number of "2000". When it is not determined to be "2000", the process proceeds to SB21. On the other hand, when it is determined to be "2000", the rainbow flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 75 in the SB 20. The rainbow flag is a flag for displaying a display mode of a predetermined effect such as a net increase number display with a rainbow pattern. A predetermined effect such as a net increase number display is displayed in a normal mode (red characters, etc.) when the rainbow flag is not set, and is displayed in a rainbow mode (rainbow pattern characters, etc.) when the rainbow flag is set. .. The predetermined effect such as the net increase number display includes the net increase number display and the end screen (also referred to as an ending effect) when the AT or bonus ends. As shown in FIG. 20B, a predetermined effect such as a net increase number display is displayed in a normal mode until the calculated net increase number reaches "2000", and the calculated net increase number reaches "2000". After that, it is displayed in the rainbow mode.

In SB21, the OVER display number of the next stage is set with respect to the currently set OVER display number. For example, when the set number of OVER displays is "500", "1000" is set as the number of OVERs displayed in the next stage, and when the set number of OVERs displayed is "1000", "1500" is next. It is set as the number of OVER displays at the stage of. In this way, once it is determined that the calculated net increase number has reached the set OVER display number, the OVER display number of the next stage is set. Therefore, for example, when the net increase number reaches "500", the OVER display of "500" is once performed, and then the number of medals owned by the player decreases to less than "500" and then reaches "500" again. Even so, it is possible to prevent the SB17 from not being determined as YES and the OVER display of "500" being performed again.

In SB22, the net increase number display on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increase number number after addition in SB10. In the ROM 77, display data for the normal mode and display data for the rainbow mode are stored as display data for displaying the net increase number of sheets. Therefore, in SB22, when the rainbow flag is not set, the display data for the normal mode is used to update the net increase number display, and when the rainbow flag is set, the display data for the rainbow mode is used to display the net increase number display. Update.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SB15 that the confirmation screen is being displayed, or when it is determined in SB16 that neither AT nor RBB is being displayed, the net increase number display has already been hidden in SB07 of FIG. The net increase number display process is terminated without displaying.

In FIGS. 18 and 19, an example of calculating and displaying the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period has been described. Next, an example of calculating and displaying the net increase number in RBB will be described. FIG. 21 (a) is a flowchart for explaining the RBB medium net increase number display process executed when the bet number is set and one game is started in RBB, and FIG. 21 (b) is a flowchart for explaining the RBB medium net increase number display process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the net increase number display process which is executed when a medal is given in the inside. When the sub CPU 71 receives the bet command, it executes the RBB medium net increase number display process of FIG. 21 (a), and when it receives the payout command, it executes the RBB medium net increase number display process of FIG. 21 (b).

First, the RBB medium net increase number display process of FIG. 21A will be described. In SB23, it is determined whether or not it is in RBB. When it is not determined in SB23 that the number of sheets is in RBB, the RBB medium net increase number display process is terminated as it is without displaying the net increase number in RBB. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB23 that the player is in RBB, the number of bets (that is, the number of bets) in this game is subtracted from the net increase in the number of cards in RBB in SB24. The net increase in the number of sheets in the RBB is stored updatable in a predetermined area of the RAM 75. In SB25, the net increase number display in RBB on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increase number number after subtraction in SB24, and the RBB medium net increase number display process is completed.

Next, the RBB medium net increase number display process of FIG. 21B will be described. In SB26, it is determined whether or not it is in RBB. When it is not determined that the SB 26 is in the RBB, the RBB medium net increase number display process is terminated as it is without displaying the net increase number in the RBB. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB26 that the number is in RBB, the number of payouts is added to the net increase in the number of sheets in RBB in SB27. In the SB 28, the display of the net increase in the number of sheets in the RBB on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increase in the number of sheets added in the SB 27, and the RBB medium net increase number display process is completed.

The RBBs in the SB23 and SB26 include, for example, not only the RBBs controlled during the non-AT period, but also the BBs controlled during the net increase number calculation period and the RBBs controlled during the end telop display. .. Therefore, for example, the net increase number in the RBB is displayed together with the net increase number in the net increase number calculation period during the net increase number calculation period, and only the net increase number in the RBB is displayed during the end telop display. Become. For example, during the RBB during the net increase number calculation period, as will be described later (FIG. 27 (c), etc.), the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period and the net increase number during the RBB are displayed, but the end telop. In the RBB when the flag is set and the end telop is displayed, only the net increase number in the RBB is displayed. In addition, the end telop may be displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the effect including the net increase number corresponding in the RBB, and in the RBB, for example, in the upper left region of the liquid crystal display 27 than usual. It may be displayed in a small form. Further, even when the end telop flag is set, it is a condition that the end telop is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, for 5 seconds or while one game is digested) based on the end telop flag during RBB. As a result, the end telop may be hidden. An example of calculating and displaying the net increase in the number of medals to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 in the RBB will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of medals paid out and the remaining payout until the end of the RBB It may be the number of sheets.

Next, the processing when the AT or bonus ends and when the net increase number calculation period ends will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining the end screen process for displaying the end screen at the end of the AT or bonus.

In SB30, it is determined whether or not the AT or bonus has ended. When it is determined that neither the AT nor the bonus has ended, the end screen process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB30 that either AT or bonus has ended, it is determined whether the rainbow flag is set in SB31 or the end telop flag based on the cumulative number is set. When it is not determined in SB31 that the rainbow flag is also set and the end telop flag based on the cumulative number is not set, the game result is displayed in the normal mode as the end screen in SB32. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB31 that the rainbow flag or the end telop flag based on the cumulative number is set, it is determined whether or not the end telop flag based on the cumulative number is set in SB33. When it is determined that the end telop flag based on the cumulative number is set, the game result is displayed as the end screen on the SB34 in the mode when the end telop is displayed based on the cumulative number (described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30). ). On the other hand, when it is not determined in SB33 that the end telop flag based on the cumulative number is set, the game result is displayed in the rainbow mode as the end screen in SB35.

As the game result in the normal mode or the rainbow mode, when the AT ends, the net increase number calculated in the net increase number calculation period and the number of AT games controlled by the AT in the net increase number calculation period are displayed. .. When the bonus ends (including a bonus that starts during the advantageous period but ends after the advantageous period ends), the number of medals acquired during the bonus is displayed. In addition, as the game result at the end of the bonus controlled during AT, the restart of AT is notified after the number of medals acquired during the bonus and the net increase number calculated in the net increase number calculation period are displayed. ..

On the other hand, as a result of the game in the mode when the end telop is displayed, when the AT ends, the net increase number calculated in the net increase number calculation period is not displayed, and the AT is controlled during the net increase number calculation period. Only the number of AT games that had been played is displayed. Further, in the RBB won or controlled during AT, the net increase number calculated in the net increase number calculation period is not displayed as the game result when the RBB ends after the end telop is displayed, and the RBB is not displayed. Only the net increase in the number of sheets is displayed. That is, the net increase in the RBB alone is displayed without displaying the total value of the net increase in the net increase calculation period and the net increase in the RBB alone.

Next, among the effect control processes, various data update processes for updating various data will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining an example of various data update processes. The various data include the effect data used when determining the type and content of the effect to be executed by the sub CPU 71, and the game history data used to provide the mobile interlocking service for accumulating the game history of the player. The sub CPU 71 executes various data update processes, for example, every time one game is completed and when an operation for terminating the mobile interlocking service (accumulation of game history) is received.

In the various data update processes, first, the effect data is updated according to the progress of the game completed in SB40 (for example, the game result). The effect data updated (specified) in the various data update processes includes the number of games played, the number of times a game has been won for each role shown in FIG. 6, the winning probability (or winning probability), and the like. , Includes RBB winning probability and net increase in RBB. Further, in the advantageous period, the total number of ATs controlled by the AT, the number of AT games that are the number of times the game is digested in the AT, the cumulative number during the advantageous period specified by the cumulative number command, and the total number of games It includes the number of stories executed according to the progress, the number of consecutive chans controlled by the AT again from the end of the previous AT to the end of the game 100 times. The effect data includes not only the data updated in SB40, but also the net increase number, the OVER display number, the rainbow flag, the end telop flag, etc., which are updated (specified) in FIGS. 18, 19, and 22.

In SB41, it is determined whether or not the mobile phone is linked. Mobile interlocking is a mode that is started by entering a password issued by the management server. The password is stored in the management server by transmitting login information for identifying the player to the management server using a communication terminal (mobile phone, smartphone, etc.) owned by the player. It is issued according to the game history of, and is displayed on the communication terminal owned by the player. In the slot machine 1, the start condition of the mobile interlocking is satisfied by inputting the password on the mobile interlocking setting screen described later, and the game history of the player stored in the management server is updated according to the progress of the game. It will be possible.

When it is not determined in SB41 that the mobile phone is being linked, the process proceeds to SB45. On the other hand, when it is determined in the SB 41 that the mobile phone is being linked, the SB 42 updates the game history data for the mobile phone interlocking according to the game result of the completed game, and shifts to the SB 43. The game history data for mobile interlocking includes, in addition to the various production data described above, characters and costumes set by the player, types of missions achieved, and the like.

In SB43, it is determined whether or not the mobile interlocking is completed. The mobile interlocking ends, for example, by accepting an operation for selecting the end of the mobile interlocking on the mobile interlocking setting screen during the mobile interlocking. When it is not determined in SB43 that the mobile interlocking is completed, the process proceeds to SB45. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB43 that the mobile interlocking has ended, the process shifts to SB44, and a two-dimensional code that enables the identification of the game history is generated based on the mobile interlocking game history data updated in SB42. While displaying on the display 27, the game history data for interlocking with the mobile phone is initialized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data from being carried over after the two-dimensional code is generated and displayed.

In SB45, it is determined whether or not the advantageous period has expired regardless of whether or not the mobile phone is linked. When it is not determined that the advantageous period has ended, the process proceeds to SB47. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous period has expired, the process shifts to SB46, and the production data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period (hereinafter, also referred to as the number-related production data) is generated. It is initialized. Specifically, among the production data updated in SB40 during the advantageous period, the cumulative number during the advantageous period, the net increase number updated (specified) in FIGS. 18, 19, and 22, and the number displayed in OVER, The rainbow flag and end telop flag are initialized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production data regarding the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period from being carried over. Further, 0 is set as the net increase number, and "500" is set as the OVER display number. As a result, it is possible to prepare for the display when the net increase number calculation period is started under the control of the next AT.

Of the production data, the production data that is not directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period (hereinafter, also referred to as the number-unrelated production data) is even after the advantageous period ends. You can take over. The number-unrelated effect data includes, for example, the number of games played, the role history, the probability of winning the RBB, the number of ATs, the number of AT games, the number of stories, the number of consecutive chans, and the net increase in the number of sheets in the RBB. The effect data inherited after the end of the advantageous period is used when determining the type and content of the effect to be executed during the next advantageous period. Note that the game history data for mobile interlocking is not initialized depending on the end of the advantageous period. As a result, regarding the game history data for mobile interlocking, even if the data is directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period, it will be carried over to the subsequent stage, and the two-dimensional code at the end of mobile interlocking will be carried over. It is possible to include it in and display it on a player's communication terminal or the like.

In SB47, it is determined whether or not the game has been digested 100 times without newly winning the AT since the end of the previous advantageous period, regardless of whether or not the mobile phone is linked. When it is not determined that the game has been completed 100 times without winning a new AT after the end of the previous advantageous period, various data update processes are terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game has been completed 100 times without winning a new AT after the end of the previous advantageous period, the game shifts to SB48 and the number-related production data in the previous advantageous period is initialized. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such that the type and content of the effect to be executed are determined based on the effect data inherited from the end of the previous advantageous period even when the so-called continuous change is not performed. However, the mobile interlocking game history data (storage area for storing the game history data) that is updated during the mobile interlocking is not initialized in the SB48. In SB47, an example of determining whether or not a game has been digested 100 times without newly winning an AT since the end of the previous advantageous period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and up to winning an AT. Instead of making it a requirement, for example, it may be determined whether or not the game has been digested 100 times without newly shifting to the next advantageous period after the end of the previous advantageous period.

As shown by SA21, SA22, and SA15 in FIG. 12, at least when the first condition is satisfied by digesting the game 1500 times in the advantageous period, and based on the lowest value of the cumulative number in the advantageous period, the present When the second condition is satisfied when the cumulative number of games reaches 2400, the advantageous period ends even if the number of remaining AT games exists. Further, as shown by SB12 to SB14 in FIG. 19, when the first condition and the second condition are soon satisfied, the corresponding end telop is displayed. This point will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining an example of an increase / decrease in the cumulative number counter and the net increase in the number of sheets during the advantageous period. In FIG. 24, the vertical axis shows the type of controlled period, the cumulative number counter, the presence / absence of the end telop, the net increase number, and the slump graph which graphs the net increase number, and the horizontal axis shows. The passage of time (game digestion) is shown from left to right. In FIG. 24, the RBB1 is won when the second condition is soon satisfied in the first advantageous period, which is controlled from the normal period to the advantageous period (referred to as the first advantageous period in FIG. 24). Controlled by the RBB, after the second condition is satisfied during the RBB and the first advantageous period ends, when a predetermined period elapses in the normal period, the advantageous period is again referred to as the second advantageous period (referred to as the second advantageous period in FIG. 24). The case where it is controlled by) is shown as an example.

First, when controlled from the normal period to the advantageous period (first advantageous period), as shown in SA01 of FIG. 9 and SA12 and SA14 of FIG. 11, the advantageous period counter and the cumulative number counter are countered according to the progress of the game. The value of is updated. The first advantageous period of FIG. 24 shows an example of being controlled by the advantageous period and being controlled by the AT. When controlled by AT (net increase number calculation period), the net increase number is updated according to the progress of the game, as shown in SB03 of FIG. 18 and SB10 of FIG. During AT, for example, since the navigation effect is executed when the push order bell is won, the value of the cumulative number counter increases, and the net increase number and the net increase number as shown in the slump graph also increase. Further, during AT, as shown in SB06 of FIG. 18 and SB22 of FIG. 19, the net increase number is updated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

After that, when the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2370 by the time the number of games in the advantageous period reaches the upper limit value (1500) according to the progress of the game, the cumulative number counter is as shown in SB13 and SB14 of FIG. The end telop flag corresponding to the arrival of the upper limit of is set, the corresponding end telop is displayed, and the net increase number from being controlled by the AT is hidden. That is, when the timing at which the second condition is soon satisfied is reached, it is possible to notify the fact by displaying the end telop, and it is surely prevented that a numerical value exceeding 2400 is displayed as the net increase number. Can be done. The end telop is displayed until the first advantageous period ends when the upper limit of the cumulative number counter is reached.

FIG. 24 shows a case where the RBB1 is won and controlled by the RBB during the AT when the timing at which the second condition is soon satisfied is reached. As shown in FIG. 6, the RBB associated with the RBB1 winning will continue until 200 sheets are paid out. Therefore, even after the first advantageous period ends when the upper limit of the cumulative number counter is reached, the actual net increase is increased by being controlled by the RBB. Specifically, in the AT when the timing when the second condition is soon satisfied is reached, for example, when the RBB1 is won and the RBB is controlled, as shown in FIG. 24, the cumulative number becomes a limiter of 2400. Even after reaching and the advantageous period ends, the actual net increase may exceed the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400.

However, as described above, the net increase in the number of sheets is hidden when the timing at which the second condition is soon satisfied is reached. Further, when the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2400, the second condition is satisfied, and the advantageous period ends, the game data during the advantageous period is initialized in SA15 of FIG. 12, and the game data during the advantageous period is initialized, and FIG. 23 In SB46 of the above, the number-related effect data in the advantageous period is initialized. Therefore, even if the actual net increase exceeds the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400, it is surely prevented that the value exceeding 2400 is displayed as the net increase. be able to. In the RBB controlled by winning the RBB in the AT when the timing when the second condition is soon satisfied is reached, the actual net increase from the AT is shown in the net increase display column of FIG. 24. Instead, only the net increase in the number of sheets in the RBB after the start of the RBB is displayed. Further, on the end screen displayed when the RBB ends, only the net increase number in the RBB after the start of the RBB is displayed, not the actual net increase number from the AT.

By the end of the controlled RBB just before the end of the first favorable period, it is already controlled in the normal period. In FIG. 24, the game is controlled again to an advantageous period (referred to as a second advantageous period in FIG. 24) by digesting the game a predetermined number of times in the normal period after the end of RBB. The second advantageous period shows an example of being controlled by the AT after being controlled by the advantageous general and CZ over a predetermined period. When controlled to the advantageous period, as described above, the values of the advantageous period counter and the cumulative number counter are newly updated according to the progress of the game. Even if it is controlled during the advantageous period, since the navigation effect is not executed during the advantageous general or CZ, the cumulative number counter becomes 0 or a negative value, and "0" is set as shown by SA16 in FIG. In addition, as shown in the slump graph, the net increase in the number of sheets also decreases in the advantageous general and during CZ as in the normal period.

In the second advantageous period of FIG. 24, it is assumed that the AT is controlled after passing through the general advantage and CZ. When controlled by AT, the net increase number is updated and displayed. During AT, when the push order bell is won, the navigation effect is executed and the net increase number increases, so the value of the cumulative number counter and the net increase number increase. After that, when the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2370 by the time the number of games in the advantageous period reaches the upper limit according to the progress of the game, the corresponding end telop is displayed and the corresponding end telop is displayed as in the first advantageous period. , The net increase number since it was controlled by AT is hidden. That is, when the timing at which the second condition is soon satisfied is reached, it is possible to notify the fact by displaying the end telop, and it is surely prevented that a numerical value exceeding 2400 is displayed as the net increase number. Can be done. The end telop is displayed until the second advantageous period ends when the upper limit of the cumulative counter is reached.

When the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2400, the second condition is satisfied, and the second advantageous period ends, the game data during the second advantageous period is initialized and the second advantageous period is completed. The number-related production data during the period is initialized. Further, after the second advantageous period ends, since it is controlled in the normal period, the navigation effect is not executed even if the push order bell is won. Therefore, the net increase number does not continuously increase as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 24, but decreases as the game progresses as shown by the solid line.

Next, a display example in the liquid crystal display 27 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, a display example such as a net increase in the number of sheets in the liquid crystal display 27 will be described. FIG. 25 shows a display example when the AT ends from the start of the ART to the time when the net increase number reaches “2000”. 25 (a) and 25 (b) are display examples when ART is started. When the ART is started under the control of the advantageous RT by the promotion replay prize, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), an image as if the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed in the background, and "AT rush!" A message is displayed, and then the background image for AT is switched as shown in FIG. 25 (b). After that, the net increase number calculation period is started, and the calculation of the net increase number is started in SB03 of FIG. 18 and SB10 of FIG.

As a background image for AT, for example, two characters are displayed in the center of the screen, the number of remaining AT games (LAST: 100G) is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and the net increase in the AT is displayed in the upper right of the display area. The number of sheets (TOTAL: 0) is displayed. Further, when the winning situation is to notify the advantageous operation mode, the advantageous operation mode shown by the circled numerical image in FIG. 25B is notified.

FIG. 25 (c) shows a display example when a BE (hereinafter, also referred to as a bell) is won in the game shown in FIG. 25 (b). When a bell is won, a message such as "Bell GET!" Is displayed in the center of the screen, and the net increase is displayed in addition to "9" as 9 medals are awarded.

FIG. 25 (d) is a display example just before the net increase number reaches “500”. The net increase in the number of sheets in the upper right of the display area is displayed as "493", and the advantageous operation mode is notified by winning the push order bell. FIG. 25 (e) is a display example when the bell is won and the net increase number reaches “500” in the game shown in FIG. 25 (d). Since 9 medals are paid out by winning the bell, the net increase is displayed in addition to "502". Further, when the number of OVER displays of "500" is reached, a message such as "500 OVER!" Is displayed as the OVER display of "500" in SB18 of FIG. Note that FIGS. 25 (e') and 25 (e') show examples of OVER display (normal mode) of each of "1000" and "1500", respectively.

FIG. 25 (f) is a display example when the next game (game) of the game shown in FIG. 25 (e) is started. When a new game is started, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted and displayed to "35G", and since "3" is set as the number of bets, the net increase number is subtracted and displayed to "499".

FIG. 25 (g) is a display example when medals are awarded and the net increase number reaches “500” again after the game of FIG. 25 (f). As shown by SB17 and SB21 in FIG. 19, once the net increase number reaches the set OVER display number, the OVER display number of the next stage is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 25 (g), even if "500" is reached again, it is possible to prevent the OVER display of "500" from being performed again.

FIG. 25 (h) is a display example of the end screen when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 and AT ends. As the end screen, an image in which the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed in the background, and as a result of the game, a message such as "Number of Result AT games: 300 TOTAL: 594" is displayed in a normal mode (FIG. 22). See SB32). When the AT ends, the advantageous period ends, and as a result, the net increase number calculation period also ends.

Further, in the slot machine 1, when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied, a caution display is performed in order to call attention to an excessive game and prevent the player from being too absorbed in the game. As shown in FIG. 25 (h), the caution display is such that at least a predetermined time has elapsed in a predetermined mode (a mode surrounded by a square frame) such as "Let's be careful about getting stuck!" In the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27. It will be displayed until you do. The predetermined notification condition is a condition that is satisfied according to the progress of the game. Based on the state command from the main control board 63, for example, the sub CPU 71 determines that the notification condition is satisfied when a state advantageous to the player such as AT or RBB ends, and displays a caution display on the liquid crystal display 27. .. The caution display will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 51.

FIG. 26 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the net increase number reaches “2000” during AT after the ART is started. FIG. 26A is a display example just before the net increase number reaches “2000”. The net increase in the number of sheets in the upper right of the display area is displayed as "1993", and the advantageous operation mode is notified by winning the push order bell.

FIG. 26B is a display example when the number of bells is won and the net increase number reaches “2000” in the game shown in FIG. 26A. When the net increase number reaches "2000", the execution flag of "2000" OVER display (rainbow mode) is set in SB18 of FIG. 19, and the rainbow flag is set in SB20. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the net increase number and the OVER display of "2000" are displayed in the rainbow mode. In the following, it is shown that the gradation in the drawing is displayed in a rainbow pattern.

FIG. 26 (c) is a display example when the next game (game) of the game in FIG. 26 (b) is started. When a new game is started, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted and displayed in "34G", and since "3" is set as the number of bets, the net increase number is subtracted and displayed in "1999". As shown in FIG. 26 (c), once the display of the net increase number is displayed in the rainbow mode, the display in the rainbow mode is maintained even if the net increase number is less than "2000".

FIG. 26 (d) is a display example when medals are given and the net increase number reaches “2000” again after the game in FIG. 26 (c). In FIG. 26D, a message such as "Bell GET!" (Hereinafter, also referred to as an acquisition message) is displayed without displaying the OVER. As described above, when the net increase number reaches "2000" for the first time, the OVER display number of the next stage is already set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26D, the OVER display of "2000" is displayed again. It can be prevented from being done.

FIG. 26E is a display example of the end screen when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 and AT ends. As the end screen, an image as if the shutter of the camera was closed is displayed in the background as in FIG. 25 (h), while a message such as "Result AT game number: 1075 TOTAL: 2145 sheets" is displayed as a game result together with a caution display. Is displayed in a rainbow mode (see SB35 in FIG. 22).

FIG. 26 (e') shows the end screen when the number of remaining AT games becomes 0 and the AT ends in a state where the net increase number is less than "2000" in the game after the net increase number reaches "2000". This is a display example. Also in this case, since the rainbow flag is set, the game result is displayed in the rainbow mode as shown in FIG. 26 (e') (see SB35 in FIG. 22).

FIG. 27 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the net increase number reaches “2000” during the bonus controlled by winning the RBB (RBB1 in FIG. 27) during AT after the ART is started. Is shown. FIG. 27A is a display example immediately before the net increase number reaches “2000”. The net increase in the number of sheets in the upper right of the display area is displayed as "1990". Further, in FIG. 27A, an expectation effect (scroll display of a message such as "super chance!") Is executed in the lower part of the display area to give an expectation for winning the bonus. It should be noted that the expectation effect can be executed with a predetermined probability even when the bonus is not won.

FIG. 27B is a display example of the confirmation screen. When the display timing determined after winning the bonus is reached, the sub CPU 71 switches the background image to the background image for the confirmation screen. As a background image for the confirmation screen, for example, one character is displayed in the center of the screen, and "Bonus confirmed!" And "Aim for 7! 777" (Note that in FIG. 27 (b), RBB1 is won. A message such as (indicating a red "7" symbol) is displayed. As shown by SB04 and SB07 in FIG. 18, the net increase number display is hidden during the confirmation screen display, but the calculation of the net increase number is continuously performed because it is the net increase number calculation period.

When the winning RBB1 is won and the bonus is started, the background image is switched to the bonus. As a background image for the bonus, for example, one character is displayed in the center of the screen, and the net increase number and the remaining number of payouts until the bonus ends (for example, the remaining number: 200) are displayed in the upper right of the display area. To. FIG. 27 (c) is a display example when a medal is paid out after winning a small winning combination for the first time after the start of the bonus. If a bell win occurs during the bonus where the specified number of bets is "2", 12 medals will be paid out. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), a message such as "12 GET!" Is displayed in the center of the display area, the net increase number is added (TOTAL: 1992), and the remaining payout number is subtracted. (Remaining number: 188). Note that FIG. 27 (c) shows an example of displaying the remaining number of payouts in the RBB, but the number is not limited to this as described above, and may be, for example, a net increase in the number of payouts or a payout number. ..

FIG. 27 (d) is a display example when the bell is won during the bonus and the net increase number reaches “2000”. When the net increase number reaches "2000" during the bonus, the net increase number and the OVER display of "2000" are displayed in a rainbow mode as shown in FIG. 27 (d).

FIG. 27 (e) is a display example of the end screen when the bonus ends when the number of payouts exceeds 200. As the end screen at the end of the bonus generated during AT, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), an image in which the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed in the background, and it is calculated during the net increase number calculation period. The net increase number (TOTAL: 2169) and the net increase number during the bonus (during the bonus: 170) are displayed in a rainbow mode. After that, a message such as "Bonus completed AT re-entry!" Notifying the AT restart is displayed in a rainbow mode, and the AT is restarted.

FIG. 27 (f) is a display example when the background image for bonus is switched to the background image for AT again. After switching to the background image for AT, as shown in FIG. 27 (f), the net increase number is displayed in a rainbow mode, and the number of remaining AT games immediately before the confirmation screen is displayed is displayed. The number of remaining AT games displayed when the bonus won during AT ends and AT is restarted is not limited to the number of remaining AT games immediately before the confirmation screen is displayed, for example, when the bonus is won. The number of games may be subtracted by 1 from the number of remaining AT games. Specifically, for example, even if the bonus is won in a game in which the number of remaining AT games is "340" and the number of remaining AT games on the display is subtracted until the confirmation screen is displayed after that, after the bonus ends. When the AT restarts, the number of remaining AT games may be displayed from "339".

After that, both the OVER display and the end screen until the end of the advantageous period will be displayed in a rainbow mode. After the bonus ends, even during AT, the initial RT will be set and the preparation period will be set. During the preparation period, the number of remaining AT games is not subtracted, and the subtraction display is restarted after being controlled by the advantageous RT.

FIG. 28 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the net increase number reaches “2000” during the confirmation screen display of the RBB during AT after the ART is started. FIG. 28A is a display example at the time of winning the RBB immediately before the net increase number reaches “2000”. The net increase in the number of sheets in the upper right of the display area is displayed as "1990". Further, in FIG. 28A, the expectation effect is executed in the lower part of the display area.

FIG. 28B is a display example when the display timing determined after winning the bonus is reached and the background image for the confirmation screen is switched. FIG. 28 (c) is a display example when the bell is won and the net increase number reaches “2000” while the confirmation screen is displayed. Even when the net increase number reaches the OVER display number such as "2000" during the confirmation screen display, it is determined as NO in SB16 of FIG. 19 and the processing after SB17 is not performed. Therefore, a message such as "Bell GET!" Is displayed without displaying OVER.

FIG. 28D is a display example when the winning RBB is won and the start of the bonus is notified after the net increase number reaches “2000” during the confirmation screen display. Along with switching to the background image for the bonus, a message such as "Bonus started!" Is displayed. Although the net increase in the number of sheets in the upper right of the display area exceeds "2000", it is displayed in the normal mode because the rainbow flag has not been set yet.

FIG. 28 (e) is a display example when a small winning combination is won for the first time during the bonus. As for the net increase number, since 12 medals are paid out after setting the bet number “2” from the state of FIG. 28 (d), the net increase number becomes “2017”. As a result, it is determined as YES in SB16 of FIG. 19, the execution flag of OVER display of "2000" is set in SB18, and the rainbow flag is set in SB20. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28 (e), the net increase number and the OVER display of "2000" are displayed in the rainbow mode. In this way, when the number of OVER displays or "2000" is reached while the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed, the OVER display can be executed at that time without setting the rainbow flag, and it is the first time since the bonus is controlled. When the medal is paid out, the OVER display is executed, the rainbow flag is set, and the display is performed in the rainbow mode.

FIG. 29 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the cumulative number reaches “2370” when the net increase number is displayed in the normal mode after the ART is started. In FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 described later, the values of the net increase number and the cumulative number counter at the time of the display screen are shown on the right side of the display screen example of the liquid crystal display 27. FIG. 29A is a display example immediately before the cumulative number reaches “2370”. The net increase in the number of sheets in the upper right of the display area is displayed as "1593", and the advantageous operation mode is notified by winning the push order bell.

FIG. 29 (b) is a display example when the total number reaches "2370" after winning a bell in the game shown in FIG. 29 (a). When the cumulative number reaches "2370" (in FIG. 29 (b), the case of reaching "2372" is illustrated), the end telop corresponding to the cumulative number reached in SB13 of FIG. 19 regardless of the net increase in the number of sheets. The flag is set and the net increase number is set to be hidden in SB14. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27, a message such as "Soon, the upper limit of the advantageous period of 2400 sheets will be reached" is displayed as the end telop, and the net increase number of sheets is displayed. Is hidden. Further, when the end telop display is displayed or when the end telop is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 29 (B), the acquisition message such as "Bell GET!" Accompanying the bell winning is not displayed. .. It should be noted that even when the end telop display is displayed or the end telop is being displayed, an acquisition message such as "Bell GET!" In this case, the ending telop may be displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the acquired message. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ending telop than the acquisition message.

FIG. 29 (c) is a display example when the next game (game) of the game in FIG. 29 (b) is started. When a new game is started, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted and displayed to "34G", and since "3" is set as the bet number, the cumulative number becomes "2369", which is less than "2370". However, as shown in FIG. 29 (c), after the cumulative number reaches "2370", the end telop is displayed and the end telop is displayed even if the cumulative number becomes less than "2370" according to the progress of the subsequent game. The hidden net increase is maintained.

Further, during the end telop display, it is determined as YES in SB12 of FIG. Therefore, for example, even when the net increase number reaches the set OVER display number, the OVER display is not performed. Further, even when the net increase number reaches "2000", it is not shifted to the SB20 of FIG. 19, and the rainbow flag is not set, so that the net increase number is not displayed in the rainbow rainbow mode. Further, even when the RBB is won and the confirmation screen is displayed during AT, or when the RBB is won and the RBB is in control, the end telop display is maintained.

FIG. 29 (d) is a display example of the end screen when the medals are given after the game in FIG. 29 (c) and the cumulative number reaches the upper limit "2400" and the AT ends. As the end screen, an image as if the shutter of the camera was closed was displayed in the background as in FIG. 25 (h), while a message such as "Result AT game number: 815" was displayed as a game result together with a caution display. Later, it will shift to the normal period. As described above, the net increase number is not displayed in the game result after the end telop is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a numerical value exceeding the upper limit of the cumulative number "2400" (a value obtained by adding the maximum number of payouts of one game to 2400) to be displayed as a net increase number.

Further, as shown by SB46 in FIG. 23, when the advantageous period ends, the number-related effect data during the advantageous period is initialized. Therefore, after the advantageous period ends, it is possible to prevent the effect from being executed based on the number-related effect data during the advantageous period. For example, the effect data to be initialized includes the net increase number of sheets updated (specified) in FIGS. 18, 19, and 22 and the like. Therefore, in the next controlled advantageous period, for example, it is possible to prevent the net increase in number including the net increase in the finished advantageous period from being displayed, and as a result, even during the next controlled advantageous period. , It is possible to prevent a numerical value exceeding the upper limit of the cumulative number "2400" from being displayed as a net increase number.

On the other hand, even when the advantageous period ends, the number-unrelated effect data before the advantageous period is carried over even after that as shown by SB46 in FIG. As described above, the number-unrelated production data before the advantageous period includes the number of games played, the role history, the probability of winning a bonus, the number of ATs, the number of AT games, the number of story stories, the number of consecutive chans, the net increase in the number of sheets in RBB, and the like. Is done. As shown by SB47 and SB48 in FIG. 23, these effect data are carried over from the end of the advantageous period until the game is digested 100 times without winning the AT, and the game is played after the advantageous period ends. When the AT is won under the control of the next advantageous period by the time it is digested 100 times, the type and content of the effect to be executed can be determined based on the effect data during the previous advantageous period during the AT. When the sub CPU 71 controls the AT, if the effect data of the previous advantageous period remains, the sub CPU 71 identifies that the AT is controlled again by the time it is digested 100 times, for example, indicating that the AT is continuously chanted. Display the image to be notified.

FIG. 29 (e) is a display example in the AT when the game is controlled by the AT from the end of the advantageous period to the time when the game is digested 100 times. As shown in FIG. 29 (e), the background image corresponding to the AT is displayed, the net increase number is newly updated from "0", and the star mark image is displayed on the left side of the net increase number display. .. The star mark is an example of the effect of notifying that the AT is controlling the AT again and continuously chanting by the time it is digested 100 times. Two star marks are displayed in the second consecutive chan. This makes it possible to identify that the current AT is the second consecutive channel. After that, each time the consecutive chans are piled up, the number of consecutive chans in the production data is updated, and the number of star marks is increased by one and displayed.

FIG. 29 (e') is a display example in the AT controlled after the game is digested 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period ends. When the game is digested 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period ends, as shown by SB47 and SB48 in FIG. 23, the number-unrelated effect data before the previous advantageous period is also initialized. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29 (e'), an image similar to the background image shown in FIG. 29 (a) and the like is displayed, and an image such as a star mark is not displayed.

FIG. 30 shows a display example when the cumulative number reaches “2370” and a display example of the end screen when the net increase number is displayed in the rainbow mode after the ART is started. During AT, an effect having a predetermined story development is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. Although the description is omitted, the same applies to the display screens during other ATs. For example, the story starts from the production corresponding to the first episode, and is subsequently updated to the production corresponding to the next number of episodes every 100 times the game is digested during AT. Therefore, when the number of AT games exceeds, for example, "1100", the production corresponding to the twelfth episode is started. FIG. 30A is a display example immediately before the cumulative number reaches “2370”. The net increase in the number of sheets in the upper right of the display area is displayed as "2193" in the rainbow mode, and the advantageous operation mode is notified by winning the push order bell. In FIG. 30A, it is assumed that the number of AT games exceeds "1100". Therefore, "Episode 12" is displayed in the lower right region of the liquid crystal display 27, indicating that the story production corresponding to the twelfth episode is being executed. As the story progresses, the number of stories in the production data is updated.

FIG. 30B is a display example when the total number reaches "2370" after winning a bell in the game shown in FIG. 30A. When the net increase number is displayed in the rainbow mode and the cumulative number reaches "2370" (in FIG. 30 (b), the case where it reaches "2372" is illustrated), it is shown in FIG. 30 (b). As shown, in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27, the end telop is displayed in a rainbow mode, and the net increase number is hidden. In addition, the number of talks is also hidden by displaying the end telop.

FIG. 30C is a display example when the next game is started. When a new game is started, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted and displayed to "34G", and since "3" is set as the bet number, the cumulative number becomes "2369", which is less than "2370". However, as shown in FIG. 30C, after the cumulative number reaches "2370", the end telop is displayed and the end telop is displayed even if the cumulative number becomes less than "2370" according to the progress of the subsequent game. The hidden net increase is maintained.

FIG. 30 (d) is a display example of the end screen when the medals are given after the game in FIG. 30 (c) and the cumulative number reaches the upper limit "2400" and the AT ends. As the end screen, an image that looks like the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed in the background, while a message such as "Result AT game number: 1105" is displayed in a rainbow mode as a game result together with a caution display, and then in a normal period. Transition. As described above, the net increase number is not displayed even in the game result after the end telop is displayed in the rainbow mode.

FIG. 30 (e) is a display example in the AT when the game is controlled by the AT from the end of the advantageous period to the time when the game is digested 100 times. FIG. 30 (e) describes a case where an image corresponding to the number of talks of the effect executed during the previous advantageous period is displayed. As shown in FIG. 30 (e), the background image corresponding to the AT is displayed, the net increase number is newly updated from "0", and the star mark image is displayed on the left side of the net increase number display. (Similar to FIG. 29), and below the net increase number display, an image of the number of episodes for identifying how many episodes have progressed in the previous advantageous period is displayed, such as "Episode 12 has been reached!". This makes it possible to identify that the current AT is the second consecutive chan and that the story has progressed to the 12th episode in the previous advantageous period. The production during the AT this time may start from the 12th episode or the 13th episode, or may start from the 1st episode again.

FIG. 30 (e') is a display example in the AT controlled after the game is digested 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period ends. When the game is played 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period ends, the number-unrelated effect data before the previous advantageous period is also initialized. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (e'), an image similar to the background image shown in FIG. 30 (a) or the like is displayed, and an image such as a star mark or a story number image is not displayed.

Next, mobile interlocking will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining a mobile interlocking setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 in the player menu state and a screen displayed on the display unit of the communication terminal owned by the player. FIG. 31A is a mobile interlocking start screen for entering a password issued by the management server to start the mobile interlocking among the mobile interlocking setting screens. On the mobile phone interlocking start screen, as shown in FIG. 31A, a message prompting the user to enter the password is displayed, and a character string is displayed below. By operating the effect operation unit 81, the issued password is input, and the mobile interlocking is started by selecting the enter icon, and the mobile phone is carried as shown by SB42 in FIG. 23 according to the progress of the subsequent game. Game history data for interlocking is accumulated.

FIG. 31B shows a two-dimensional code generated based on the game history data for mobile interlocking when the mobile interlocking is terminated by operating the effect operation unit 81 on the mobile interlocking setting screen. This is the mobile phone interlocking end screen. On the mobile interlocking end screen, a two-dimensional code is displayed as shown in FIG. 31 (b). As shown by SB44 in FIG. 23, the displayed two-dimensional code is a code that can specify the game history data for interlocking with a mobile phone. By reading the two-dimensional code with the communication terminal, the player can confirm the game history displayed on the display unit of the communication terminal based on the game history data for interlocking with the mobile phone. Further, by reading the two-dimensional code, the communication terminal can transmit the game history data for interlocking with the mobile phone to the management server and store it as the game history of the player.

FIG. 31 (c) is a game history screen displayed on the display unit of the communication terminal by reading the two-dimensional code with the communication terminal owned by the player. By reading the two-dimensional code, the display unit of the communication terminal displays the current game history accumulated during the current mobile interlocking and the total game history totaled with the game history accumulated in the past. The game history data for mobile interlocking includes, for example, not only game history data that is not directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period controlled during mobile interlocking, but also game history data that is paid out during the advantageous period. It also includes game history data that is directly related to the number of medals awarded. Therefore, on the game history screen, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the game history (for example, the number of games, the number of ATs, AT) that is not directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period. In addition to the number of games, the number of stories, etc.), the game history (net increase in AT), which is directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period, can be displayed.

(About caution display)
Next, the caution display shown in FIG. 25 and the like will be described in detail. The sub CPU 71 outputs an image to be displayed according to the progress of the game and information capable of specifying the layer / display position for each image to the liquid crystal display 27, and sets the layer on which the image is drawn according to the priority of the layer. The superimposed image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. The slot machine 1 in the present embodiment determines the relationship (layer, display position, etc.) with other images (effects) displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 in order to fully exert the function of calling attention by the caution display. There is.

FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the priority of the area used for display and the priority of the layer in the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 for each of the caution display and the other image display. FIG. 32A is a diagram showing regions 1 to 5 in which the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 is divided into five. FIG. 32B is a diagram showing the priority of areas and layers used for display for each type of image.

As the caution display, the area 2 corresponding to the center of the display area shown in FIG. 32 (a) is used, and the highest priority "1" is set as the layer priority. Therefore, even if another image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, the caution display image can always be displayed so that the player can see it.

The error notification notifies the type of the error when the sub CPU 71 determines that an error has occurred based on the error command. Areas 1 and 3 corresponding to the upper and lower parts of the display area are used for error notification, and "2" is set as the priority of the layer.

In the navigation effect, the sub CPU 71 notifies the advantageous operation mode based on the advantageous operation mode command from the main CPU 61. For the navigation effect, the area 3 corresponding to the lower part of the display area is used, and "3" is set as the priority of the layer.

The history display displays the net increase in the number of games in the advantageous state and the number of games in the advantageous state (for example, the number of AT games) when the advantageous state for the player such as AT or RBB ends. is there. For the history display, the area 3 corresponding to the lower part of the display area is used, and "4" is set as the priority of the layer.

The suggestion display suggests a set value set in the slot machine 1. In the suggestion display, for example, suggestion A suggesting that the set value is likely to be an even number, suggestion B for confirming that the set value is 5 or more, It includes suggestion C and the like for confirming that the set value is 6. When the set value is set, the main CPU 61 outputs a command capable of specifying the set value to the sub CPU 71. The sub CPU 71 specifies a set value based on the command, and determines whether or not to execute the suggestion display, the type of the suggestion display, and the like by a random number lottery based on the set value (hereinafter, also referred to as a suggestion display lottery). For the suggestion display, any of the areas 4 and 5 corresponding to the left and right sides of the display area is used, and "5" is set as the priority of the layer.

The dialogue display is a production that can be developed up to three stages over multiple games. In the first stage of the dialogue display, explanations and explanations such as effects generated in the slot machine 1 are displayed. The second and subsequent stages of the dialogue display are displayed when the next game is started after the game in which the first stage is displayed is completed. The display of the second and subsequent stages of the dialogue display suggests the set value set in the slot machine 1 as in the suggestion display. The second stage dialogue display suggests that the set value may be 5 or more. The third-stage dialogue display suggests that the set value may be 6. Therefore, from the first stage of the dialogue display, it is only a material to deepen the understanding of the production and the like. However, from the second and subsequent stages of the serif display, the player can predict the set value.

The sub CPU 71 specifies the set value based on a command capable of specifying the set value, and based on the set value, whether or not the dialogue display is executed, the type of dialogue display (how many stages to develop, the content of the dialogue, etc.) ) Is determined by a random number lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as a dialogue display lottery). The dialogue display uses different areas depending on the stage. Area 1 corresponding to the upper part of the display area is used for the image of the first stage of the dialogue display. In the second stage image of the serif display, the area 2 corresponding to the central portion of the display area is used. Area 3 corresponding to the lower part of the display area is used for the image of the third stage of the dialogue display. In the dialogue display, "6" is set as the priority of the layer regardless of the image at any stage.

The background is for displaying an image according to a state controlled by the slot machine 1 (general game state, RBB, CZ, AT, error, etc.). The sub CPU 71 displays a background image according to the state specified by the state command or the like. As the background, the entire display area is used, and "7", which is the lowest priority of the layer, is set. Therefore, even if the background image is displayed on the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 27, other images can be preferentially displayed by superimposing the background image on the background image. As described above, the image of the chance button effect may be displayed on a layer having a higher priority than the background image. For example, the layer priority may be any of "3" to "6". It may be set.

Here, the priority and the like regarding the display of the end telop will be described. The display of the end telop is displayed at least in the history display, the suggestion display, the dialogue display, and the layer having a higher priority than the background. Further, the display of the end telop may be displayed on the same layer as any of the caution display, the error notification, and the navigation effect, and may be displayed on the layer having a higher priority than any of them. There may be.

Further, since the end telop is displayed in the area 2 of FIG. 32 (a) as shown in FIG. 29 and the like, for example, an example is shown in which the end telop does not overlap with the area 3 for displaying the navigation effect. However, a part of the area of the end telop and the area of the navigation effect may overlap each other. Even in this case, both the display of the end telop and the display of the navigation effect may be displayed so that the player can recognize or identify them.

Further, regarding the relationship between the end telop and the player menu screen according to the operation to the effect operation unit 81, the player menu screen can be displayed even when the end telop is displayed. In this case, , The player menu screen may be displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the end telop. As a result, it is possible to display the end telop and notify that the advantageous period is about to end, while preventing the end telop from deteriorating the visibility of menu items and the like on the player menu screen.

33 and 34 are timing charts for explaining an example of the effect related to the caution display. 33 and 34 show a case where the notification condition of the caution display is satisfied by terminating the AT as an advantageous state. Although a plurality of production examples are shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the types of game states, the number of games, the rotation states of the reels 11L to 11R, and the background, identification, suggestion, and caution of the effects are shown from the top. It shows the execution status. A background image corresponds to the background. Suggestions correspond to suggestions. Attention corresponds to the caution display. In particular, error notification, navigation effect, history display, dialogue display (first stage), etc. other than these are supported. The suggestion is an image that is displayed as the game progresses. Specific is an image that is a condition that can be satisfied according to the progress of the game and is displayed when the specific condition related to the game is satisfied. In FIGS. 33 to 42 referred to in the explanation of the caution display, an example in which the condition for displaying the end telop is not satisfied will be described, but when the cumulative number reaches "2370" or the advantageous period counter When the value of is 5 or less, the end telop display is performed as described with reference to the drawings up to FIG. 32. When the caution display described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 42 is performed during the end telop display, the end telop display is terminated at the timing when the caution display is performed.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the final game in an advantageous state is started, an ending effect for ending the advantageous state is performed in the final game. During the ending effect for the end of the advantageous state, a caution display and a history display are performed, and a navigation effect and a suggestion display are performed according to the winning status and the result of the suggestion display lottery. In addition, after the next game after the ending effect is completed, the dialogue is displayed according to the result of the dialogue display lottery. First, with reference to FIG. 33, an effect example (hereinafter, also referred to as an attention completion pattern) in which the attention display is completed during the ending effect will be described.

FIG. 33A is a timing chart for explaining an effect example 1 in which history display and dialogue display are performed as specific displays. The timing 1 indicates the timing at which the reel rotation is started and one game (final game) is started when the value of the remaining AT game number counter is “1”. Until the final game starts, the background for AT (for example, an image of falling lightning bolts, a story image containing narrative elements, etc.) is displayed as a background image, but when the final game starts, It is switched to the ending background for the end of AT. As the ending background for the end of AT, for example, an image in which the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed (described later with reference to FIG. 35 (a) and the like).

In the final game in which the number of games is "N + 1" in FIG. 33 (a), for example, because the push order bell is not won, the navigation effect is not performed, and the suggestion display is not won in the lottery. Is not done either. The timing 2 is a timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the final game was started, and indicates a timing at which the caution display is started.

The caution display is displayed in the area 2 having the highest priority. The caution display is displayed until a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses from the start of the display. When the sub CPU 71 adds the value of the caution display counter that can specify the time when the caution display is displayed by 1 at predetermined intervals, and the value of the caution display counter reaches a value corresponding to "3 seconds". End the caution display. The caution display counter is added and updated in a predetermined area of the RAM 75.

The timing 3 indicates the timing at which the stop switches 21L to 21R are operated to stop the rotation of all the reels 11L to 11R and the final game is completed. When the final game ends, the history is displayed, and the net increase in the number of medals and the number of AT games in the advantageous state of ending are notified. The history display is displayed in the layer in the area 3 and the priority is "4". Therefore, the caution display is not hindered by the history display.

The timing 4 indicates the timing at which the sub CPU 71 determines that a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the caution display based on the caution display counter and ends the caution display. The caution display can be continued until a predetermined time elapses while maintaining the display mode at the beginning of the display in the area 2, and is not hindered by other images (history display, background, etc.). Therefore, the function of calling attention by the caution display can be fully exerted.

Timing 5 indicates the timing at which the game is started in the normal period after the end of AT. When the game in the normal period is started, the background is switched to the background image for normal use. In addition, in the first game of the normal period after the end of AT, the dialogue is displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide fun such as guessing the set value by developing the dialogue display up to the second stage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 33B is a timing chart for explaining an effect example 2 in which a navigation effect is performed as a specific display by winning a push order bell or the like in the final game. When the final game is started, as shown in timing 1, the background for AT is switched to the ending background for ending AT, and the navigation effect is displayed. Even when the navigation effect is displayed, the caution display is performed at the timing 2 as in the effect example 1 of FIG. 33 (a). The navigation effect is displayed in the layer in the area 3 and the priority is "3". Therefore, the caution display is not obstructed by the navigation effect. Since the timing 2 and thereafter are the same as the production example 1 of FIG. 33 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 33C is a timing chart for explaining an effect example 3 in which the suggestion display is performed in the final game. Similar to FIG. 33A, the timing 2 indicates the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the final game was started. The suggestion display starts at timing 2. When the suggestion display is performed, the caution display is not performed at the timing 2. Therefore, in the final game, the player can pay attention to whether the suggestion display or the caution display is performed at the timing 2.

Timing 2'indicates the timing at which the suggestion display ends. When the suggestion display ends, the caution display starts. Since the suggestion display is a display that suggests a set value (advantage) of the slot machine 1, the player's line of sight tends to be concentrated. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, the caution display is not performed in parallel with the suggestion display, and the caution display is performed after the suggestion display is completed. Further, since the caution display is displayed in the area 2 different from the areas 4 and 5 in which the suggestion display is performed, it is possible for the player to easily notice that the display content has changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the attention display from being overlooked, and it is possible to fully exert the function of calling attention by paying attention to the caution display.

FIG. 33D is a timing chart for explaining an effect example 4 in which a navigation effect and a suggestion display are performed in the final game. In the description of FIG. 33 (d), FIG. 35 is referred to. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the display contents of the effect example 4 on the liquid crystal display 27.

At the timing 1 when the final game is started, the ending background is switched and the navigation effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 35 (a), an ending background image for AT end such as a shutter of a camera is displayed on the entire display area, and an image of a navigation effect is displayed in the area 3.

At timing 2, the suggestion display is performed. In the example of FIG. 35 (b), the image of the character A is displayed in the area 5 as a suggestion display. The suggestion display for displaying the character A is, for example, an example of the suggestion A suggesting that the set value set is likely to be any of even numbers (2, 6). As a result, it is possible to suggest the advantage of the slot machine 1 to the player, and it is possible to provide the player with the fun of guessing.

At timing 2', the suggestion display is terminated and a caution display is performed. As shown in FIG. 35 (c), the suggestion display in the area 5 is completed, and the caution display is performed in the area 2. At timing 3, the final game ends and the history is displayed. As shown in FIG. 35 (d), a display such as "TOTAL: 540 sheets" is displayed as a history display in the area 3, and a caution display in the area 2 is continuously performed without being hindered by the history display.

At the timing 5, the game is started in the normal period after the end of AT, the background is switched to the normal background, and the dialogue is displayed. As a background image for normal use, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), an image of the sun is displayed in the upper right of the display area, and although not shown in FIG. 35 (e), a corresponding image is displayed in the entire display area. Is displayed. Further, as the first stage of the dialogue display, a dialogue such as "Character A is reasonable" is displayed as a message explaining the suggestion display displayed in FIG. 35 (b). This makes it easier for the player to understand the content of the suggestion display.

If the second and subsequent stages are not performed as the dialogue display, the dialogue display ends when the next game is started. On the other hand, when the second and subsequent stages are performed as the dialogue display, when the next game is started, a dialogue such as "I'm expecting!" Is displayed in the area 2 as shown in FIG. 35 (f). Depending on the content of the lines from the second stage onward, the possibility that the set value is 4 or more and the possibility that the set value is 6 are different. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a material that suggests a set value and make a prediction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), an effect example in which the attention display is not completed during the ending effect (hereinafter, also referred to as an attention incomplete pattern) will be described. FIG. 34 (a) is a timing chart for explaining an effect example 5 in which the suggestion display is not performed during the ending effect, and FIG. 34 (b) is a timing chart in the case where the suggestion display is performed during the ending effect. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the production example 6.

The caution display is continuously displayed until a predetermined time elapses after the display is started. Therefore, if the operation for ending the final game and starting the next game (bet number setting, start switch 19 operation) is performed by the time when the predetermined time elapses from the start of the caution display, the ending effect is produced. As shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the caution display is not completed during the ending effect regardless of whether or not the suggestion display is performed.

Timing 6 indicates the timing at which the game is started in the normal period after the end of AT. Similar to FIG. 33, at timing 6, the background is switched to a normal background image. In addition, in the first game in the normal period after the end of AT, the dialogue is displayed. Further, in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), since a predetermined time has not yet passed since the caution display was started at the timing 6, the caution display is continuously performed.

Here, the display contents of the effect example 6 on the liquid crystal display 27 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 (g) and 35 (h). At the timing 6, the dialogue is displayed and the caution is continuously displayed. The first stage of the dialogue display is displayed in the layer of the area 1 and the priority is "6", whereas the caution display is displayed in the layer of the area 2 and the highest priority "1". Will be done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 (g), it is possible to prevent the caution display from being obstructed by the dialogue display.

The timing 7 indicates the timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the caution display and the caution display is finished. FIG. 35 (h) shows the display contents when the second and subsequent stages are performed as the dialogue display when the next game is started. The caution display has already ended at timing 7. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 (h), the second stage dialogue can be displayed in the area 2 without affecting the caution display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34 (c), the effect when the caution display is not completed during the ending effect and an error occurs during the operation for starting the first game in the normal period after the end of AT. It is a timing chart for demonstrating Example 7. FIG. 34 (c) illustrates a case where a selector error occurs. The timing 8 indicates the timing when the medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 25 for the start of the first game in the normal period, but the medal is clogged in the selector and a selector error occurs. That is, the timing 8 is the timing at which the sub CPU 71 specifies that a selector error has occurred based on the error command output from the main CPU 61. When it is identified that an error has occurred, the background for the error is switched and an error message corresponding to the type of error is displayed. Further, at the timing 8, an error notification is performed as a specific display, and the caution display is continuously performed because a predetermined time has not yet passed since the caution display was started.

Here, the display contents of the effect example 7 on the liquid crystal display 27 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (i). At timing 8, a character image with a troubled expression is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen as a background image for an error, and a corresponding image is displayed on the entire display area, although not shown in FIG. 35 (i).

Further, as an error notification, a message image such as "selector error !!" in the area 1 and "call a clerk!" In the area 3 is displayed in the layer of priority "2". On the other hand, the caution display is continuously displayed in the layer having the highest priority in the area 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 (i), it is possible to prevent the caution display from being obstructed by an error notification or the like. As shown in FIG. 34 (c), the caution display ends at the timing 9 when the predetermined time has elapsed.

In FIGS. 34 (c) and 35 (i), an example in which the caution display is continuously performed even during the error notification has been described. However, this is not limited to this during error notification, and for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), caution display is temporarily stopped during error notification (timing 8'-10'), and caution is given after the error notification ends. It may be the one that resumes the display.

The caution display to be resumed may be displayed with the remaining time up to the predetermined time when the operation is temporarily stopped. Specifically, the value of the caution display counter at the time of stopping once may be maintained, updated from the value after restarting, and the caution display may be terminated when the value corresponding to the predetermined time is reached. Further, when the caution display is resumed, the caution display may be performed until a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the restart time. Specifically, the sub CPU 71 is provided with determination information for determining whether or not the caution display has been displayed for a predetermined time (3 seconds), and has been displayed for a predetermined time based on the determination information after the error notification is completed. If this is the case, the caution display may not be performed, and if the warning display has not been performed for a predetermined time based on the determination information, the caution display may be restarted. Further, when the error notification is performed, the caution display may be terminated so that the caution display is not performed even after the error notification is completed.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the caution display is performed when the AT ends in an advantageous state has been specifically described, but the slot machine 1 also pays attention when the bonus controlled by the RBB winning ends. Display. The slot machine 1 may display caution at other timings as long as it displays caution at least when an advantageous state such as AT or bonus ends.

(About processing related to additional production)
Next, the processing related to the additional effect will be described in detail. In the effect control process, in the AT process SA07, SA08, SA09, etc. shown in FIG. 9, it is related to the addition of the AT effect based on the command output from the main CPU 61 side for each game during the AT. Control the production. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining an example of the addition-related effect control process for controlling the effect related to the addition among the effect control processes.

The SB50 receives the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command output (SA07, SA08, SA09 in FIG. 9) for each game during AT, and processes the SB51 and thereafter. To execute. In SB51, it is determined whether or not the end telop flag is set. When it is determined that the end telop flag is set in SB51, since the end telop flag has already been set, the addition-related effect control process is performed without determining the remaining upper limit number of games up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods. finish. On the other hand, when it is not determined in SB51 that the end telop flag is set, it is determined in SB 52 whether or not the number of remaining upper limit games up to the upper limit of the advantageous period is 5 or less. The number of remaining upper limit games up to the upper limit of the advantageous period is specified based on the remaining upper limit number of games command from the main CPU 61. When it is determined in SB 52 that the number of remaining maximum games up to the maximum number of advantageous periods is 5 or less, the game shifts to SB 53.

In SB53, the end telop flag for displaying the corresponding end telop is set. As the end telop when it is determined that the number of remaining upper limit games up to the upper limit of the advantageous period is 5 or less, a message such as "Soon, the upper limit of the advantageous period of 1500 G will be reached" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. To do. As a result, the end telop is displayed until the end of the advantageous period.

On the other hand, when it is not determined in SB52 that the number of remaining upper limit games up to the upper limit of the advantageous period is 5 or less, the game shifts to SB54. In SB54, it is determined whether or not the number of additional games added in the current game specified from the number of additional games command is a value greater than 0. When it is not determined in SB54 that the number of additional games is greater than 0 this time, the additional related effect control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SB54 that the number of additional games is greater than 0 this time, it is determined in SB55 whether or not the number of remaining AT games is equal to or greater than the number of remaining upper limit games. The number of remaining AT games is specified from the number of remaining AT games commands received in SB50. Further, the remaining upper limit game number is specified from the remaining upper limit game number command received in SB50.

When it is not determined in SB55 that the number of remaining AT games (the number of games after the number of additional games is added) is equal to or greater than the maximum number of remaining AT games, that is, the number of remaining maximum games is still consumed even if the remaining number of AT games is consumed. In the situation where the number of additional games is not reached, an additional effect for notifying the number of additional games specified from the number of additional games command is set in SB56. As a result, the additional effect is executed. As an additional effect, for example, when the number of additional games is "100", a message such as "100 game GET!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, and a sound effect such as "Dawn!" Is output to the speakers 31L and 31R. Output from.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SB55 that the number of remaining AT games is equal to or greater than the remaining maximum number of games, that is, in a situation where the remaining number of AT games is reached by the time the remaining number of AT games is consumed, the special background in SB57 is Is already set and it is determined whether or not the special background is being executed. When it is determined in SB57 that the special background has been set and the special background is being executed, the addition-related effect control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the special background has been set in SB57 and the special background is being executed, the special background is set in SB58 and the addition-related effect control process is terminated. As a result, the special background is premiered only in the situation where the number of AT games is added and the advantageous period can be continued up to the maximum number of games (1500) in the advantageous period. As the special background, for example, a special background screen having a story is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 and the corresponding music / sound effect is output from the speakers 31L and 31R until the remaining upper limit number of games is reached. As a result, the player can have a sense of superiority in completing the advantageous period. The special background will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. Further, even during the period until the special background is set, when the cumulative number reaches "2370" or when the remaining upper limit number of games becomes 5 or less, the corresponding end telop is displayed. In addition, even if the conditions for executing the additional effect and the conditions for setting the special background are satisfied during the end telop display, the execution of the additional effect and the switching to the special background are restricted, and the end telop display is continued. And. Further, when the special background is set, the chance button effect may not be executed even at the timing of executing the chance button effect, and the special background is set in the game in which the chance button effect is executed. If there is a possibility that the game will be added (when an additional game is added and the value obtained by adding the number of additional games to the remaining AT games is equal to or greater than the remaining maximum number of games), the chance button effect should not be executed. It may be.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of controlling a predetermined effect including an additional effect, a special background, etc., depending on whether or not the maximum number of remaining AT games is reached by the time the remaining AT games are consumed. This will be described using the timing chart shown in. FIG. 37 (a) shows an example when the upper limit has not been reached even if the remaining number of AT games is consumed, and FIG. 37 (b) shows the remaining before the remaining number of AT games is consumed. An example is shown when the maximum number of games is reached and the maximum number of games is confirmed. 37 (a) and 37 (b) show, from the top, the rotation status of the reels 11L to 11R, the number of remaining AT games, the number of remaining upper limit games, the presence / absence of execution of the additional lottery, the presence / absence of execution of the additional effect, and the special. Indicates whether or not the background is executed.

FIG. 37A shows a case where the additional lottery condition is satisfied in the game A shown in the reel column. The number of remaining AT games when the game A is started is "431", and the number of remaining upper limit games is "497". In this case, when "50" is determined as the number of additional games by the additional lottery, the number of remaining AT games after the addition becomes "481", and the upper limit has not been reached yet. At the SB56 of 36, an additional effect for notifying the number of additional games "50" is executed.

FIG. 37B shows a case where the additional lottery condition is satisfied in the game B shown in the reel column. The number of remaining AT games when the game B is started is "468", and the number of remaining upper limit games is "497". In this case, when "50" is determined as the number of additional games by the additional lottery, the number of remaining AT games after the addition becomes "518" and the upper limit is reached when the upper limit is reached. When YES is determined in SB55 of 36, the execution of the additional effect is restricted (see the additional effect column in FIG. 37 (b)). When the upper limit is confirmed, the special background is set by SB58 in FIG. 36, so that the special background can be executed (see the special background column in FIG. 37 (b)). Further, even when the special background is executed, when the cumulative number reaches "2370" or when the remaining upper limit number of games becomes 5 or less, the corresponding end telop is displayed with priority.

FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a display example when the background screen during AT is switched from the normal effect to the special background. FIG. 38A is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the background screen during AT is switched from the normal effect to the special background. In FIG. 38 (a), the type of game state, the number of games, and the effects to be executed on the liquid crystal display 27 are shown from the top, the background, the number of remaining games, and the execution status of the navigation effect, and are added to the bottom as the game progress. Indicates the presence or absence of. Further, FIG. 38 (a) shows (b) as the timing during the N + 4 game, and (c) as the timing when the N + 5 game is started. 38 (b) and (c) show background examples during AT corresponding to the timings (b) and (c) shown in FIG. 38 (a), respectively.

During AT (ART) during the advantageous period, as shown in the background column of FIG. 38 (a), either a normal effect or a special background is executed as the background during AT. In the example of FIG. 38 (a), it is assumed that the number of AT games is added in the N + 4 game and the AT is continued up to the upper limit of the advantageous period. Therefore, in FIG. 38 (a), the background by the normal effect is displayed up to N + 4, and the special background is displayed after N + 5. FIG. 38 (b) shows an example of background display of a normal effect, and FIG. 38 (c) shows an example of background display of a special background.

In the background of the normal effect, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), for example, two characters are displayed in the center of the screen, and the number of remaining AT games as the number of remaining games in the upper left of the display area (the number of remaining AT games is 350). In the case of, LAST: 350G) is displayed, the total number of games consumed during AT (TOTAL: 535G) is displayed, and the net increase in the number of games during AT (GET: 1105) is displayed in the upper right of the display area. The total number of games is the total number of games digested during AT. On the other hand, the number of games digested in the advantageous period includes all the number of games digested during the advantageous period regardless of the state such as CZ or bonus as well as during AT. Therefore, the total number of games and the number of games consumed during the advantageous period do not always match. In the normal production, the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of advantageous periods is not displayed as the number of remaining games.

On the other hand, in the special background, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), after, for example, two characters are displayed in the center of the screen, an effect having a special story is started. Further, in the special background, the number of remaining games in the upper left of the display area is switched from the number of remaining AT games to the number of remaining upper limit games. When the number of remaining upper limit games is, for example, 440, "until the ending: 440G" is displayed as shown in FIG. 38 (c). Even in the special background, the net increase in the number of sheets is continuously displayed. On the other hand, the total number of games is not displayed in the special background, but may be continuously displayed even after the start of the special background.

Further, in the upper center of the display area, a message such as "Completion confirmed! ~ Congratulation ~" is displayed to notify that AT continuation has been confirmed up to the upper limit of the advantageous period. Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the background of the band-shaped area above the display area where various information is displayed is displayed in a special mode (for example, a rainbow mode). The gradation in the drawings indicates that it is displayed in a special manner. As a result, it is possible to emphasize that it is confirmed that the AT will be continued up to the upper limit of the advantageous period, and it is possible to improve the superiority complex of the player.

<About administrator menu status and player menu status>
In the effect control process, it is possible to execute a process for displaying the administrator menu screen that controls the administrator menu state during the setting change process and displays and sets the management items for the administrator. Further, in the effect control process, it is possible to execute a process for displaying the player menu screen for displaying and setting the game items for the player by controlling the player menu state during the game standby. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining display triggers, end triggers, and control contents when an error occurs during menu display of each of the administrator menu screen and the player menu screen.

The sub CPU 71 displays the administrator menu screen by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 during the setting change process. Further, the sub CPU 71 detects whether the operation to the start switch 19 is detected (setting is confirmed) and the change processing start switch 56 is turned off (key off) in the setting change processing (that is, the setting change end command is received), or the effect operation unit. The display of the administrator menu screen is terminated when a predetermined specific time elapses without the 81 being operated, or when the setting of any management item is completed in the administrator menu state. The sub CPU 71 determines that the setting change process is in progress from the time when the setting change start command is received until the time when the setting change end command is received. During this time, the sub CPU 71 displays the administrator menu screen by executing the sub-side setting change state process described later with reference to FIG. 47.

The sub CPU 71 executes an error determination process for determining whether or not a predetermined error has occurred on the sub CPU 71 side, but similarly executes the error determination process even in the administrator menu state. On the other hand, as described above, the main CPU 61 does not execute the error determination process on the main CPU 61 side when the setting change process is being executed. Therefore, when the sub CPU 71 determines that an error has occurred in the error determination process on the sub CPU 71 side while the administrator menu screen is being displayed, an error on the sub CPU 71 side (sub system) rather than the administrator menu screen. Error) Give priority to notification. Here, the sub system error means a communication error between the main control board and the sub control board, a communication error between the sub CPU and the liquid crystal display, and the like.

The sub CPU 71 displays the player menu screen by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 during the game standby. Further, the sub CPU 71 is determined in advance without the determination switch 81a being operated or the effect operation unit 81 being operated with the "end" item for ending the display of the player menu screen selected. The display of the player menu screen is terminated when time elapses or when the setting of the mobile interlocking service (including the quick start described later) is completed on the player menu screen. The sub CPU 71 determines, for example, that the game is on standby between the time when the game result command is received and the time when the reel rotation start command is received. During this time, the sub CPU 71 displays the player menu screen by executing the sub-side game standby process described later with reference to FIG. 48.

The sub CPU 71 executes an error determination process for determining whether or not a predetermined error has occurred on the sub CPU 71 side, but similarly executes the error determination process even in the player menu state. Further, the main CPU 61 executes the error determination process on the main CPU 61 side even during the game standby. Therefore, when the sub CPU 71 determines that an error has occurred in the error determination processing of each of the main CPU 61 side and the sub CPU 71 side, the sub CPU 71 gives priority to the error notification over the player menu screen.

Both the display of the administrator menu screen and the display of the player menu screen are terminated when a predetermined time elapses without operating the effect operation unit 81. The specific time defined as the time for closing the administrator menu screen is set to be shorter than the predetermined time defined as the time for closing the player menu screen. For example, the specific time is set to 30 seconds, while the predetermined time is set to 3 minutes. Therefore, when the menu screen is left unoperated, the display of the administrator menu screen can be terminated at a timing earlier than the timing at which the display of the player menu screen is terminated. As a result, the slot machine 1 can reduce the possibility that the administrator menu screen will be seen by the player. Hereinafter, the player menu screen will be specifically described.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the player menu screen in the player menu state. The sub CPU 71 first displays the game screen (including the screen displayed from the reel rotation) on the liquid crystal display 27 during the game standby, and transitions to the demo screen when a predetermined time elapses. In this way, when the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is operated while the game screen or the demo screen during the game standby is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, the sub CPU 71 controls the player menu state. Then, the menu top screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as the player menu screen. On the menu top screen, "quick start" item, "mobile phone interlocking service" item, "role composition" item, "effect customization" item, and "end" item, which are examples of game items, are displayed.

The "quick start" item is an item for starting a quick start. A quick start is a game in which information that can identify the game history such as the number of games accumulated since the quick start is selected, the number of small wins, and the number of bonus wins can be output at the end of the game without entering a password. The mode. By using a mobile terminal or the like to output the information output at the end of the game to a predetermined server, the player can update the game history of the player managed on the server.

The "mobile phone interlocking service" item is an item for starting the mobile phone interlocking service. The mobile interlocking service allows you to play a game while reflecting the game history of the player by entering the password issued by the predetermined server, and also updates the game history of the player on the server. It is a game mode that can be played. At the end of the game, as in the quick start, it is possible to output information that can identify the accumulated game history and update the game history of the player managed on the server.

The "combination configuration" item includes information on the winning combination defined in the slot machine 1 (for example, information shown in FIG. 6 such as a winning combination name, a symbol combination, and the number of payouts) and a transition of the gaming state (for example, in FIG. 8 or AT). It is an item for displaying (transition, etc.). The "effect customization" item is an item for selecting and setting a type of effect such as a background or an effect to be executed according to the progress of the game according to the player's preference. The "end" item is an item for ending the player menu screen and transitioning to the demo screen.

On the menu top screen, one of the items displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switches of the effect operation unit 81 is selected, and the item selected by operating the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81. To decide. The sub CPU 71 executes the process corresponding to the determined item. The cursor is displayed for the game item selected by operating the up / down / left / right switches on the player menu screen, and the game item is highlighted (see FIGS. 40, 41 (a), etc.).

When the "quick start" item is selected and determined, the sub CPU 71 shifts to the demo screen after displaying the start screen to the effect that the quick start is started on the liquid crystal display 27. While displaying the start screen, the CPU 71 executes a process for starting a quick start (starting accumulation of game history in the RAM 75, etc.).

When the "mobile interlocking service" item is selected and determined, the sub CPU 71 shifts to the demo screen after displaying the start screen of the mobile interlocking service on the liquid crystal display 27. As the start screen of the mobile interlocking service, first, a password input screen is displayed, and a screen indicating that the mobile interlocking service is started when the entered password is an appropriate password is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. Further, the CPU 71 executes a process for starting the mobile interlocking service (reflection of the game history, start of accumulation of the game history in the RAM 75, etc.).

When the "combination configuration" item is selected and determined, the sub CPU 71 displays information on the combination defined in the slot machine 1 (for example, combination name, symbol combination, number of payouts, etc.) as a screen of the second layer. The information shown in FIG. 6) and the transition of the gaming state (for example, the transition of FIG. 8 and AT) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. When the "role composition" item is selected and determined, first, the combination composition screen showing the information about the combination defined in the slot machine 1 is displayed, and the "next" item and the "return to menu top" item are displayed. indicate. When the "next" item is selected and determined, the game flow screen showing information on the transition of the game state (for example, the transition of FIG. 8 or AT) is displayed, and the "return" item and "return to the menu top" are displayed. Display items and. When the "Back" item is selected and determined, the screen returns to the role composition screen, and when the "Return to menu top" item is selected and determined, the screen returns to the menu top screen. The "game flow screen" has been described as an example included in the "role composition" item, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the "game flow" item can be selected separately from the "role composition" item on the menu top screen. , The screen may be displayed when the "game flow" item is selected and determined.

When the "effect customization" item is selected and determined, the sub CPU 71 displays the production customization screen on the liquid crystal display 27 as the screen of the second layer. In the production customization screen, as the screen of the second layer, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the "navi voice" item, the "costume" item, the "wallpaper" item, the "return to default" item, and "return to the menu top". "Item is displayed.

The "navi voice" item is an item for selecting a character type (type of output voice) when executing an effect that generates voice (for example, a navigation effect). When the "Navi Voice" item is selected and determined on the effect customization screen, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), any of a plurality of types of characters A to E can be selected as the third layer screen. "Item is displayed. As a result, one of the displayed characters is selected by operating the up / down / left / right switches of the effect operation unit 81. When selected, the voice of the character is output from the speakers 31L and 31R. Further, when the item selected is determined by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81, the setting information for identifying the character is stored in the RAM 75, and the display of the "character" item is terminated. Return to the second layer screen. At this time, by displaying a setting completion message such as "Navi voice has been set to character XX", the player can be informed that the setting has been made, and the player recognizes that the setting has been made. Can be done. Then, during the game, the navigation effect is executed using the voice data of the set character. Among the "character" items, the "character?" Item is a character that cannot be selected at present and can be selected after the player reaches a predetermined level by accumulating the game history or the like. In addition, during the production customization, not only when the "character" item is displayed, but also when the player decides the item on the third layer screen, the second layer screen is not displayed instead of the first layer screen. Return to. That is, the production customization is continued. As a result, the player can continuously set another item, and the convenience can be improved.

The "costume" item is an item for selecting the type of costume of the character. When the "costume" item is selected and determined on the production customization screen, the "costume" item on which any of a plurality of types of costumes A to E can be selected is displayed as the screen of the third layer. As a result, one of the costumes displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switches of the effect operation unit 81 is selected. When selected, the image of the costume may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. Further, when the item selected is determined by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81, the setting information for identifying the costume is stored in the RAM 75, and the "costume" item of the liquid crystal display 27 is stored. The display ends and the screen returns to the second layer screen. At this time, by displaying a setting completion message such as "Costume XX has been set", the player can be informed that the setting has been made, and the player can recognize that the setting has been made. .. Then, during the game, the character is displayed according to the costume of the set costume. Among the "costume" items, the "costume?" Item is a costume that cannot be selected at present, and can be selected after the player reaches a predetermined level by accumulating the game history or the like.

As a screen when the "effect customization" item is selected and determined, in FIG. 41, when the item is selected and determined in the second layer image (FIG. 41 (a)), the screen is switched to the third layer image. (FIG. 41 (b)), when an item is selected and determined in the image of the third layer, the image returns to the image of the second layer again (FIG. 41 (a)). However, the screen when the item is selected and determined is not limited to this, and when the item is selected and determined in the image of the second layer, the image of the third layer is displayed while the image of the second layer is displayed. May be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), when the "NaviVoice" item is selected and determined, the "Character" item on which any of a plurality of types of characters can be selected is displayed on the liquid crystal display as the screen of the third layer. It may be displayed in the display area on the right side of the vessel 27. Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (d), when the "costume" item is selected and determined, the "costume" item on which any of a plurality of types of costumes can be selected is displayed on the liquid crystal as the screen of the third layer. It may be displayed in the display area on the right side of the vessel 27. In this case, when the item selected is determined by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81, the setting information for identifying the character or the costume is stored in the RAM 75, and the right side of the liquid crystal display 27 is stored. You may end the display of the "character" item or the "costume" item in the display area of the above and return to the screen of the second layer.

The "wallpaper" item is an item for selecting the type of an image (frame image, etc.) that is fixed to some extent among the backgrounds displayed during the game. When the "wallpaper" item is selected and determined on the effect customization screen, the "wallpaper type" item that allows one of a plurality of types of wallpapers to be selected is displayed as the third layer screen. As a result, any kind of wallpaper displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switches of the effect operation unit 81 is selected. When selected, the image of the wallpaper may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. Further, when the item selected is determined by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81, the setting information for specifying the type of the wallpaper is stored in the RAM 75, and the "wallpaper type" of the liquid crystal display 27 is stored. The display of the item is finished and the screen returns to the second layer screen. At this time, by displaying a setting completion message such as "Set as wallpaper XX", the player can be informed of the setting and the player can recognize that the setting has been made. .. Then, during the game, the background is displayed by the set wallpaper.

The "return to default" item is an item for returning the navigation voice, costume, wallpaper, etc. set in the production customization to the default state. When the "Return to default" item is selected and determined on the production customization screen, the setting information stored in the RAM 75 is initialized, and after displaying a message such as "The setting information has been cleared" on the production customization screen. , Return to the second layer screen again.

The "return to menu top" item is an item for returning to the menu top screen. When the "Return to menu top" item is selected and determined on the effect customization screen, the effect customization screen is closed and the menu top screen is displayed.

In FIG. 40, as the player menu screen, a menu top screen of the first layer, various display screens of the second layer, an effect customization screen, and an effect customization screen of the third layer are illustrated. Of these, no matter which player menu screen is displayed, the demo screen is displayed when the predetermined time elapses without the effect operation unit 81 being operated. The player menu screen is a screen for displaying or setting game items for the player. Therefore, the predetermined time is set longer than the specific time set for the administrator menu screen. As a result, it is possible to make settings with a relatively large margin while checking the game items at the player's pace.

Further, the sub CPU 71 may operate the bet switch 15 or the maximum bet switch 17 or insert a medal into the medal insertion slot 25 regardless of which player menu screen is displayed in the player menu state. When the number of bets is set or the start switch 19 is operated, the player menu screen is terminated and the screen transitions to the game screen. As a result, when the player confirms the intention to start the game, the game can be started immediately.

<About power-on processing>
When the power switch 50 is operated from the OFF state to the ON state, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main CPU 61 performs the power-on processing shown in FIG. 42.

In the power-on processing, first, in S01, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal is ON. The power failure signal is a signal that is turned on until the output voltage from the power supply unit 49 becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value. When it is determined in S01 that the power failure signal is ON, it stands by as it is. On the other hand, when it is no longer determined that the power failure signal is ON, access to the RAM 65 is permitted in S02.

In S03, backup failure determination processing is performed on the RAM 65. In the backup failure judgment process, for example, a checksum judgment for determining a backup failure using the chuck sum value, a power failure flag judgment for determining an abnormal power failure based on the value of the power failure flag, and a stack pointer range when the power is turned off Stack pointer judgment to determine, setting value judgment of whether the set value is within the predetermined range (1 to 6), internal winning information upper judgment of whether the internal winning information upper level is within the predetermined range, etc. When it is determined that it is abnormal, it is determined that the backup state of the RAM 65 is bad, and the RAM error flag is set as error data. The error data is data for identifying the presence or absence of an error that has occurred at various timings.

In S04, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the door sensor 20 is in the ON state. When the front door 5 is closed with respect to the housing 3, the detection signal from the door sensor 20 is turned on. When it is not determined that the door sensor 20 is in the ON state, the front door 5 is in the open state with respect to the housing 3, so in S05, is the change processing start switch 56 operated to be in the ON state? Whether or not it is determined. When it is determined that the change processing start switch 56 is in the ON state, the setting change processing is performed in S10. The setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S04 that the door sensor 20 is in the ON state, or when it is not determined in S05 that the change processing start switch 56 is in the ON state, the result of the RAM backup failure determination process in S03 is the result in S06. Whether or not it is defective is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM error flag is set. When the RAM error flag is set and it is determined to be defective, error processing is performed in S11 and the power-on processing ends. Error handling will be described later with reference to FIG. 44. On the other hand, when the RAM error flag is not set and it is not determined in S06 that the reel is defective, it is determined in S07 whether or not any one of the reels 11L to 11R is rotating.

When it is determined in S07 that any one of the reels 11L to 11R is rotating, the reel restart state is set in S08. As a result, a setting is made to restore the rotating state of the reel to the state before the power is turned off. In S09, the sensor error (EA error) determination process is performed, and the power-on process ends. In the sensor error (EA error) determination process, it is determined whether or not the insertion sensor 53 in the medal selector 48 is in the ON state, and when it is determined that the insertion sensor 53 is in the ON state, the sensor error (EA error) flag is set as error data. It is a process to set as.

As shown in FIG. 42, during the setting change processing in S10, error determination processing such as S06 and S09 is not performed. Therefore, as described above, the main CPU 61 does not execute the error determination process when the setting change process is being executed.

<About timer interrupt processing>
As described above, the main CPU 61 has an interrupt function such as timer interrupt. The main CPU 61 performs the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 43 every predetermined time after the power-on processing is completed. In the timer interrupt processing, first, in S15, phase output processing is performed on the reel motors 14L to 14R. Specifically, excitation data for rotation of each of the reels 11L to 11R is output to the stepping motors constituting the reel motors 14L to 14R.

In S16, a command transmission process for transmitting a command from the main CPU 61 side to the sub CPU 71 side is performed in the normal state. In S17, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal is turned on and the power is turned off. When it is determined that the power is cut off, the power cutoff process is performed in S23. In the power failure process, the stack pointer, the power failure flag, the checksum value, and the like are set.

When it is not determined in S17 that the power is cut off, the lamp processing is performed in S18. In the lamp processing, the lamp, LED, and the like connected to the main control board 63 are driven and controlled. In S19, port input processing is performed. In the port input process, signals from switches and sensors connected to the main control board 63 are input.

In S20, monitoring processing of various sensors is performed. In the monitoring process of various sensors, for example, a process of monitoring a selector sensor such as an input sensor 53 mounted on a selector, a process of monitoring a payout sensor 54, a process of monitoring a detection state of a door sensor 20 and the like are performed. , Error judgment is performed based on the detection results of various sensors. When an error is detected, a command for transmission when an error occurs is set, and various error data are set.

In S21, it is determined whether or not a transmission command for identifying an error set in the monitoring process of S20 is set. When it is not determined that there is a transmission command, the process proceeds to S24, and when it is determined that there is a transmission command, a transmission command for identifying an error is transmitted from the main CPU 61 side to the sub CPU 71 side in S22. Perform command transmission processing to do so.

In S24, it is determined whether or not the error data is set. When it is determined in S24 that the error data is set, the error processing is performed in S25 and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. Error handling will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

On the other hand, when it is not determined in S24 that the error data is set, the medal insertion determination is performed in S26. In S27, the medal payout determination is performed. In S28, the timer update process is performed. In S29, port output processing is performed. In S30, external signal output processing is performed. In the external signal output processing, a signal for specifying the occurrence of an error, a signal for specifying the open / closed state of the front door 5, and the like are output externally to the hall computer managed by the manager of the amusement park. In S31, the control processing of the reels 11L to 11R is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<About error handling>
Next, the error processing executed in S11 of FIG. 42 and S25 of FIG. 43 will be described. In the error processing, first, the current gaming state is saved in S35. In S36, an error flag corresponding to the error data is set and transmitted to the sub CPU 71.

In S37, the contents of the payout display 46 (game medal payout number display) are saved. In S38, the error code is displayed by the payout display 46. In S39, the states of the hopper unit 43 (game medal payout device) and the switching solenoid 51 (cancellation coil) are stored. In S40, the hopper unit 43 (game medal payout device) and the switching solenoid 51 (cancellation coil) are set (off state setting).

Subsequently, in S41, it is determined whether or not the state is an E4 error state (see S11 in FIG. 42). When it is determined that the state is in the E4 error state, the process proceeds to S53, and the state waits until the setting change process is performed.

When it is not determined in S41 that it is in the E4 error state, it is determined in S42 whether or not it is in the E3 error state (hopper empty error). When it is determined that it is in the E3 error state, it shifts to S43, and when it is determined that it is not in the E3 error state, it shifts to S44.

In S43, it is determined whether or not the error release sensor is in the ON state. Since this S43 is a hopper empty error, the error release sensor here is a door key reset. The door key reset is established by turning the key (door key) for opening the front door 5 in the direction opposite to the unlocking direction of the front door 5. When it is determined that the error release sensor is in the ON state, the process proceeds to S46, and when it is determined that the error release sensor is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S44.

In S44, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 52 (setting change switch) is in the ON state. When it is determined that the reset switch 52 is in the ON state, it shifts to S45, and when it is determined that it is not in the ON state, it shifts to S41.

In S45, it is determined whether or not the door sensor 20, which is the door open / close sensor of the front door 5, is in the ON state. When it is determined that it is in the ON state, it shifts to S41, and when it is determined that it is not in the ON state, it shifts to S46.

In S46, it is determined whether or not any of the three selector sensors A, B, C constituting the input sensor 53 and the two payout sensors A, B constituting the payout sensor 54 is in the ON state. When it is determined that it is in the ON state, it shifts to S41, and when it is determined that it is not in the ON state, it shifts to S47.

In S47, the states of the hopper unit 43 (game medal payout device) and the switching solenoid 51 (cancellation coil) are returned to the original states. In S48, the error code display is cleared (initialized). In S49, the contents of the payout display 46 (game medal payout number display) are restored. In S50, the gaming state is restored. In S51, an error release event (command) is transmitted to the sub CPU 71. In S52, the transmission determination of the game medal payout start event (command) is performed to the sub CPU 71, and the error processing ends.

<About setting change processing>
Next, the setting change process executed in S10 of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. When the main CPU 61 starts the setting change process, it outputs a setting change start command capable of specifying that fact to the sub CPU 71 and executes the setting change process. In the setting change process, first, in S60, it is determined whether or not a backup failure of the RAM of the main CPU 61 is set. When it is not determined that the backup failure is set, the set value information is read in S61, and the process proceeds to S65. At this time, the set value is displayed on the payout display 46 that functions as the set value display during the setting change process. The set value display is not limited to a display such as the payout display 46 that allows the display state to be confirmed even when the front door 5 is closed, but is provided on the back side of the front door 5 and is provided on the back side of the front door 5. It may be a display whose display state cannot be confirmed unless the display state is opened. Further, the set value display is not limited to the one that also serves as a display for displaying other information, and may be a dedicated display provided only for displaying the set value.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a backup failure is set, "C" is displayed on the payout display 46 in S62, and whether or not the reset switch 52 (setting switch) is in the ON state in S63. It is judged. When it is not determined that it is in the ON state, it goes into a standby state, and when it is determined that it is in the ON state, "1" is set as a set value in S64, and the process shifts to S65.

In S65, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 52 (setting switch) is in the ON state. When it is determined that it is in the ON state, the set value is updated in S66. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the start switch 19 is in the ON state, it is determined in S67 whether or not the ON state of the start switch 19 is detected. When it is not determined that it has been detected, the process proceeds to S65.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it has been detected, it is determined in S68 whether or not the change processing start switch 56 is in the off state. When it is not determined to be in the off state, the standby state is set, and when it is determined to be in the off state, the set value is confirmed (stored in the RAM 65) in S69, and the setting change process is completed. When the setting change process is performed, the RAM 65 of the slot machine 1 is initialized. As a result, the E4 error is cleared. Further, when the setting change processing is completed, the main CPU 61 outputs a setting change end command capable of specifying that fact to the sub CPU 71.

<About sub-control unit processing>
When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the sub CPU 71 performs the sub control unit processing shown in FIG. In the sub-control unit processing, first, it is determined in S900 whether or not the power is turned on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the output voltage from the power supply unit 49 exceeds a predetermined threshold value. When it is determined in S900 that the power has been turned on, a predetermined activation process such as a security check or an operation check of the liquid crystal display 27 or the like is performed in S901. After that, in S902, processing according to various states is performed.

<About sub-side setting change status processing>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart for explaining the sub-side setting change state process included in the process of S902 in the sub-control unit process. In S910, it is determined whether or not the setting change state (whether the setting change start command is received) in which the setting change process is being executed on the main CPU 61 side is determined. When it is not determined in S910 that the setting is in the change state, the sub-side setting change state process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S910 that the setting has been changed, the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 is controlled to be the basic screen of the administrator menu state. Further, it is determined in S911 whether or not the operation of the effect operation unit 81 on the determination switch 81a is detected. When it is determined that the operation of the effect operation unit 81 on the determination switch 81a is detected, the administrator menu process is performed in S913. As a result, the administrator menu screen is displayed.

In S914, a timer for a timeout corresponding to a specific time is set. In S915, it is determined whether or not the operation on the effect operation unit 81 is detected. When it is determined in S915 that the operation to the effect operation unit 81 is detected, the process proceeds to S913 and the display or setting corresponding to the operation is performed in the administrator menu state. Further, in S914, the timer for the timeout corresponding to the specific time is reset.

On the other hand, when it is not determined in S915 that the operation to the effect operation unit 81 is detected, it is determined in S916 whether or not the timer set in S914 has timed out. When it is not determined in S916 that the time-out has occurred, it is determined in S917 whether the setting change state has ended (whether the setting change end command has been received), that is, whether the setting change process has ended. When it is not determined in S917 that the setting change state has ended, the process proceeds to S915. When it is determined in S917 that the setting change state has ended, the sub-side setting change state processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S916 that the time-out has occurred, it is the time when the specific time has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 81, so the process proceeds to S911. As a result, the basic screen in the administrator menu state is displayed. After displaying the completion screen in the administrator menu state in S913, the transition to S911 occurs when the corresponding post-setting time (time after the first to third settings) elapses, and the basic in the administrator menu state. The screen is displayed.

Returning to S911, when it is not determined that the operation of the effect operation unit 81 on the determination switch 81a is detected, it is determined in S912 whether or not the setting change state is completed. When it is not determined in S912 that the setting change state has ended, the process proceeds to S911. On the other hand, when it is determined in S912 that the setting change state has ended, the sub-side setting change state processing ends. The demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 after the administrator menu screen or the basic screen is closed in the sub-side setting change state processing.

<About sub-side game standby processing>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart for explaining the sub-side game standby process included in the process of S902 in the sub-control unit process. In S920, it is determined whether or not it is in the game standby state (when a specific effect is not executed, from the reception of the game result command to the reception of the reel rotation start command). When it is not determined in S920 that the game is in the game standby state, the sub-side game standby process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S920 that the game is in the game standby state, the game screen or the demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in FIG. 40. Further, in S921, it is determined whether or not the operation of the effect operation unit 81 on the determination switch 81a is detected. When it is determined that the operation of the effect operation unit 81 on the determination switch 81a is detected, the player menu process is performed in S923. As a result, the player menu screen shown in FIG. 40 is displayed. As described above, when the chance button effect is being executed, the player menu screen may not be displayed even if the determination switch 81a is operated.

In S924, a timer for a timeout corresponding to a predetermined time is set. In S925, it is determined whether or not an operation on the effect operation unit 81 is detected. When it is determined in S925 that an operation on the effect operation unit 81 is detected, the process proceeds to S923, and a display or setting corresponding to the operation is performed as shown in FIG. 40. Further, in S924, the timer for the timeout corresponding to the predetermined time is reset.

On the other hand, when it is not determined in S925 that the operation to the effect operation unit 81 is detected, it is determined in S926 whether or not the timer set in S924 has timed out. When it is not determined that the time-out has occurred in S926, whether or not the bet number setting (BET) has been set in S927 or the start switch 19 (start lever) has been operated (whether a bet command or a reel rotation start command has been received) has been received. It is judged.

When it is not determined in S927 that the start switch 19 has been operated, the bet number setting also shifts to S925. When the bet number is set or the start switch 19 is determined to be operated in S927, the sub-side game standby process is terminated. As a result, the game screen shown in FIG. 40 is displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S926 that the time-out has occurred, since the predetermined time has elapsed without the effect operation unit 81 being operated, the process proceeds to S921. As a result, the demo screen shown in FIG. 40 is displayed.

Returning to S921, when it is not determined that the operation of the effect operation unit 81 on the determination switch 81a is detected, it is determined whether the bet number is set or the start switch 19 is operated in S922. When it is not determined in S922 that the start switch 19 has been operated in the bet number setting, the process proceeds to S921. On the other hand, when it is determined in S922 that the number of bets is set or the start switch 19 is operated, the sub-side game standby process is terminated. As a result, the game screen shown in FIG. 40 is displayed.

<About sub-side error notification processing>
FIG. 49 is a flowchart for explaining the sub-side error notification process. In S930, it is determined whether or not the transmission command from the main CPU 61 has been received. The transmission command is a command transmitted in S22 based on the monitoring result of S20 in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 43. When it is not determined in S930 that the transmission command has been received, the sub-side error notification process is terminated.

When it is determined in S930 that the transmission command has been received, it is determined in S931 whether or not the transmission command is a command related to the door state of the front door 5. When it is not determined in S931 that the transmission command is a command related to the door state of the front door 5, an error notification corresponding to the transmission command is performed in S932. Specifically, a voice such as "Error" is output from the speakers 31L and 31R, and an error code such as "E3" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

In S933, it is determined whether or not the error flag has been received. The error flag is a flag transmitted in S36 of the error processing of FIG. 44 after the error occurs. When it is determined that the error flag has been received, the corresponding error notification is performed again in S934.

In S935, it is determined whether or not the error release event has been received. The error release event is an event transmitted in S51 after the error is released in the error processing of FIG. 44. When it is not determined that the error release event has been received, the standby state is set and the error notification is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error release event has been received, the error notification is cleared (initialized) in S936, and the sub-side error notification process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S931 that a command regarding the door state has been received, it is determined in S937 whether or not the front door 5 is in the open state. When it is determined that the front door 5 is in the open state, an error notification is performed in S939, and the sub-side error notification process ends. On the other hand, when it is not determined in S937 that the front door 5 is in the open state, it means that the front door 5 is in the closed state, so that the error notification is cleared (initialized) in S938, and the sub-side error notification processing is performed. To finish.

<Example of effects produced by slot machine 1>
In the slot machine 1 according to the above embodiment, the chance button effect is not started during the period from the detection of the first stop operation to the detection of the final stop operation of the third stop operation. Therefore, the chance button effect for prompting the player to operate the determination switch 81a is not started while the player performs the first stop operation and then accepts the subsequent stop operations. As a result, the flow of the game is not interrupted while the subsequent stop operations are being accepted after the first stop operation is performed, and the second stop operation and the third stop operation with good rhythm are performed following the first stop operation. It is possible to prevent the stop operation from being hindered.

Further, the chance button effect is not started in the period from the detection of the bet number setting operation for setting the bet number to the detection of the start operation ON. For this reason, a chance button effect that prompts the player to operate the decision switch 81a while the player is performing the bet number setting operation but the start operation has not yet been performed and the game is not confirmed to be performed. Will not be started. As a result, for example, it is confirmed whether or not the chance button effect is executed by performing the bet number setting operation, and if the chance button effect is not executed, the set bet number is released and the game is not executed. It is possible to prevent us from being fooled.

Further, the image corresponding to the chance button effect is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the layer displaying the image corresponding to the background. Therefore, for example, the processing load is not increased as compared with the case where the priority of the image corresponding to the chance button effect is set according to the type of the background. In addition, it is not necessary to prepare an image corresponding to the background in which the image corresponding to the chance button effect is embedded. As a result, it is possible to reliably display the image corresponding to the chance button effect.

Further, the chance button effect (including the chance button effect executed during the continuous effect) is executed so as to obtain the distribution rate illustrated in FIG. For example, when a privilege is given such as when a CZ transition lottery, an AT transition lottery, and an additional lottery are won, or when a bonus is won (the winning table in FIG. 15A), the CZ A special pattern is determined as a mode of the chance button effect at a higher rate than when no privilege is given because the player has not won in the transition lottery or the like (table at the time of non-winning in FIG. 15B). Therefore, when the chance button effect is started in a special mode, the expectation that the privilege is given can be improved.

Further, the rate at which the winning notification effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect is the start timing of the chance button effect when the third stop operation ON is detected rather than the pattern when the start ON is detected (for example, the winning pattern 3). The pattern (for example, winning pattern 4) is higher. For this reason, when the chance button effect is started when the third stop operation ON is detected, the expectation that the winning notification effect is executed as the operation response effect is raised more than when the chance button effect is started when the start ON is detected. Can be done. In addition, when the start ON is detected, the expectation that the privilege is given is raised, and it becomes easier to maintain the expectation that the privilege is given until the third stop operation ON is detected, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be improved. In addition, since it is easy to execute the winning notification effect when the third stop operation ON is detected, it is easy to identify whether or not the privilege is given when the third stop operation ON is detected, and the privilege is given. It is possible to give a sharp impression to whether or not it is possible.

Further, the ratio at which the chance button effect of the pattern of executing the winning suggestion effect as the operation corresponding effect is started when the start ON is detected (for example, the distribution rate of the winning pattern 1) is the pattern of executing the winning notification effect as the operation corresponding effect. The chance button effect of is set to be higher than the rate (for example, the distribution rate of the winning pattern 4) that is started when the third stop operation ON is detected. For this reason, it is possible to provide many opportunities to raise the sense of expectation by starting the chance button effect of the pattern of executing the winning suggestion effect when the start ON is detected, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the chance button effect in the special aspect is the total distribution of the winning patterns 6 and 8 when the third stop operation ON is detected (for example, the total distribution of the winning patterns 6 and 8) rather than when the start ON is detected (for example, the total distribution rate of the winning patterns 5 and 7). Rate) is high. On the other hand, the chance button effect in the normal mode is more when the start ON is detected (for example, the total distribution of the winning patterns 1 and 3) than when the third stop operation ON is detected (for example, the total distribution rate of the winning patterns 2 and 4). Rate) is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation that the chance button effect is started in a special mode at the time of detecting the third stop operation ON, which is the timing after the start ON detection.

The effect displayed in the standby state, the guidance effect for guiding to the player menu, displays an image smaller than the chance button effect in the display area near the edge of the liquid crystal display 27. Therefore, in the standby state, it is possible to prevent the guidance effect for prompting the operation of the determination switch 81a from being executed in a manner that gives an excessive sense of expectation.

Further, the chance button effect once started is continuously executed even after the period during which the chance button effect can be started has elapsed, and the operation to the determination switch 81a is effectively accepted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences that may cause the player to panic.

Further, when the chance button effect is executed, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the determination switch 81a is controlled by a predetermined power consumption regardless of whether or not the eco mode is set as the power consumption mode. That is, even when the eco mode is controlled, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the determination switch 81a is controlled with the same power consumption as in the normal state. For this reason, regardless of the controlled power consumption mode, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the chance button effect is being executed, and it becomes difficult to understand the target to be operated. Can be prevented.

Further, the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment has the following effects.

(1-1) As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the cumulative number reaches 2370 and the advantageous period ends soon, the end telop is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as a specific effect. As a result, even if the AT ends when the upper limit of the cumulative number is reached, the end telop notifies that fact, so that it is possible to avoid the sudden termination of the AT, and the slot machine 1 can be notified. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent distrust. Further, the display of the net increase number of sheets on the liquid crystal display 27 ends in response to the display of the end telop. As a result, the liquid crystal display 27 displays a net increase of 2400 or more (or a value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400) while reducing the discomfort that the display of the net increase is completed during AT. It can be prevented from being stored. As a result, the player's gambling spirit can be suppressed.

(1-2) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, after the end telop is once displayed based on the cumulative number, it is determined as YES in SB11 of FIG. 19, so that the end telop is displayed regardless of the cumulative number. Since the display and the non-display of the net increase number are maintained, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. Further, after the end telop is displayed, it is not necessary to perform the processing according to the cumulative number, so that the processing load can be reduced.

(1-3) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, on the subsequent end screens after the net increase number is hidden by displaying the end telop, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, regardless of the cumulative number thereafter. The net increase number is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a net increase of 2400 or more from being displayed even on the end screen. Further, even though the net increase number is hidden according to the display of the end telop, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that causes a sense of discomfort due to the net increase number being displayed on the end screen.

(1-4) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, regardless of the net increase number displayed during AT, the end telop is uniformly displayed and the net increase number is hidden according to the cumulative number. As a result, regardless of the displayed net increase in the number of sheets, the AT does not end suddenly, and it is possible to prevent the game machine from being distrusted. Further, since it is not necessary to perform the processing according to the displayed net increase number of sheets, the processing load can be reduced.

(1-5) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as shown by SB12 in FIG. 19, when AT is in progress, the cumulative number reaches the same 2370 regardless of whether or not it is in RBB. By displaying the end telop. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing according to whether or not it is in RBB, so that the processing load can be reduced.

(1-5) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as described in the first advantageous period of FIG. 24 and the like, the slot machine 1 is said to be in the RBB controlled when the net increase number is not displayed in the AT. Only the net increase number in RBB is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of only the net increase in the RBB while preventing the net increase of 2400 or more from being displayed as the net increase in the AT.

(1-6) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as described in the first advantageous period of FIG. 24, when the controlled RBB ends when the end telop is displayed during AT. As the end screen to be displayed, the net increase number in AT is not displayed, and only the net increase number in the RBB is displayed. As a result, the player can be notified of the net increase in the number of RBB games while preventing the net increase of 2400 or more from being displayed as the AT game history.

(2-1) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, on the main CPU 61 side, a plurality of types of game data are updated according to the progress of the game during the advantageous period, and a plurality of types of game data are updated when the advantageous period ends. The game data is initialized (SA26 in FIG. 12). As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of types of game data from being carried over after the end of the advantageous period and used for the subsequent progress of the game. On the other hand, on the sub CPU 71 side, based on the command from the main CPU 61 for making it possible to specify a plurality of types of game data, a plurality of types of effect data are updated so that the effect according to the progress of the game can be executed. With the end of the advantageous period, among a plurality of types of production data, the number-related production data that is directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period is initialized (SB46 in FIG. 23). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number-related effect data from being carried over after the end of the advantageous period and being used for executing the effect according to the progress of the game thereafter. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the net increase in the number of sheets that can be specified from the number-related effect data in the advantageous period that has already ended and the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous period that is currently being controlled and displayed. As a result, the player's gambling spirit can be suppressed.

On the other hand, among multiple types of production data, unlike the number-related production data that may arouse the player's gambling spirit, it is directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period. The number of unrelated effect data that has not been set is not initialized when the advantageous period ends. Therefore, for example, an effect that takes into account the number of sheets unrelated effect data before the advantageous period that has already ended can be executed during the advantageous period that is currently being controlled. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a production based on the game history during the advantageous period that has ended within a range that does not arouse the player's gambling spirit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2-2) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as shown by SB47 and SB48 in FIG. 23, during the AT controlled by winning from the end of the advantageous period to the digestion of the game 100 times, It is possible to execute an effect according to the number of sheets unrelated effect data updated before the previous advantageous period. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a new AT will be won from the end of the advantageous period to the time when the game is digested 100 times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2-3) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, when the game is digested 100 times without winning the AT from the end of the advantageous period, as shown by SB48 in FIG. 23, the production data before the previous advantageous period is displayed. It is initialized. As a result, in a situation where the relationship with the previous advantageous period has already deteriorated, the production is executed based on the number-unrelated production data before the advantageous period, which reduces the interest of the game. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of such inconvenience.

(2-4) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (e) and the like, the star mark is based on the number of consecutive chans in the number-unrelated production data before the previous advantageous period. The number of consecutive chans can be notified by the number of. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (e) and the like, it is possible to notify how many stories have progressed based on the number of stories in the number-unrelated production data before the previous advantageous period. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without inciting the player's gambling spirit.

(3-1) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, even when the end telop is displayed and the net increase number is hidden, the game history data for mobile interlocking is shown in the figure regardless of the cumulative number. Updated at SB42 of 23. As a result, for example, it is possible to generate and display a two-dimensional code capable of displaying a net increase number exceeding 2370 or 2400 on a communication terminal. As a result, while controlling the display / non-display of the net increase number in the slot machine 1 to suppress the gambling spirit of the player, the net increase number hidden in the slot machine 1 in the communication terminal owned by the player It is possible to display the net increase in the number of cards that cannot be displayed, and to update the game history of the player on the management server. For this reason, it is possible to respond to a request to look back and confirm the game history of the player himself / herself who has performed in the past, or a request to keep a record of the game history.

(3-2) As shown in FIG. 23, the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment does not initialize the game history data for mobile interlocking used to generate the two-dimensional code when the advantageous period ends. .. Therefore, even after the advantageous period ends, the two-dimensional code generated based on the game history data for interlocking with the mobile phone can be generated and reflected in the communication terminal or the management server owned by the player. As a result, even after the advantageous period ends, not only the net increase in the number of sheets but also other game histories can be displayed on the communication terminal. Therefore, the player can look back and confirm the game history in the advantageous period that has already ended via the communication terminal.

(4) The slot machine 1 in the above embodiment calculates the net increase number in the net increase number calculation period from the control by ART to the end of the advantageous period by SB03 in FIG. 18 and SB10 in FIG. SB06 and SB22 in FIG. 19 display the net increase in the number of sheets during AT or bonus. Further, until the calculated net increase number reaches the OVER display number of "2000" which is a specific number, the net increase number is displayed in the normal mode shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 (a). When the net increase reaches the OVER display number of "2000", the net increase is displayed in the rainbow mode shown in FIG. 26 (b) and thereafter, and thereafter, the net increase is "2000" as shown in FIG. 26 (c). Even when it becomes less than ", the display in the rainbow mode is maintained. As a result, after the net increase number reaches the OVER display number of "2000", it is displayed in the rainbow mode regardless of whether the net increase number is less than "2000". As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the OVER display number of "2000" has been reached depending on whether or not the net increase number is displayed in the rainbow mode, and even if the player overlooks the OVER display of "2000" or the like. Even after that, since the net increase number is displayed in the rainbow mode, it is possible to grasp that the slot machine 1 is operating normally, and it is possible to prevent the slot machine 1 from being distrusted. ..

In addition, the net increase number is continuously calculated even during the bonus controlled by winning during AT, and when the net increase number reaches the OVER display number of "2000" during the bonus, FIG. 27 (d) ) Is displayed in the rainbow mode, and even if the net increase is less than "2000" after that, the display in the rainbow mode is maintained. As a result, the AT and the bonus can be related in terms of calculating and displaying the net increase number, and the interest of the game can be improved, and even when the bonus is controlled, the net increase number is in the rainbow mode. Whether or not the OVER display number of "2000" has been reached can be grasped by whether or not it is displayed, and it is also possible to grasp that the slot machine 1 is operating normally by displaying the net increase number in the rainbow mode. It is possible to prevent the slot machine 1 from being distrusted.

In addition, the net increase in the number of sheets is continuously calculated even during the RBB internal winning state in which the bonus is won. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 28 (b) and 28 (c), the display of the net increase number is interrupted from the time when the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed until the time when the bonus is controlled. As a result, when the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed, the player can concentrate on winning the winning bonus and controlling the bonus. Further, when the net increase number reaches the OVER display number of "2000" from the display of the bonus winning confirmation screen to the control of the bonus, after the bonus is controlled as shown in FIG. 28 (d). After displaying the net increase number in the normal mode, the net increase number is displayed in the rainbow mode when a medal is given by a small winning combination or the like as shown in FIG. 28 (e). As a result, the net increase in the number of sheets is suddenly displayed in a rainbow mode at the moment controlled by the bonus, which makes us feel that a special effect (for example, suggestion of high setting) has been executed. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences that may confuse the player.

In addition, between the time when the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed and the time when the bonus is controlled, the OVER display is not executed even when the net increase number reaches the set OVER display number, and the bonus is controlled. After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (e), the OVER display is executed when a medal is awarded due to a small winning combination or the like. As a result, when the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed, the player can concentrate on winning the winning bonus and controlling it to the bonus, and at the moment when the bonus is controlled, the OVER display is suddenly displayed. By being executed, it is possible to prevent the feeling that a special production has been executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences that may confuse the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20 and the like, when the net increase number reaches the OVER display number of less than "2000", the OVER display is displayed in the normal mode, and when the net increase reaches the OVER display number of "2000" or more. The OVER display is displayed in a rainbow mode. That is, when the net increase in the advantageous state reaches any of a plurality of predetermined stages including a number less than the specific number and a number greater than or equal to the specific number, the slot machine 1 has the number of stages. The arrival effect display means for displaying the arrival effect to the effect that the item has been reached is provided, and the arrival effect display means displays the arrival effect in the predetermined display mode when the net increase number reaches the number of stages less than the specific number. When the net increase number reaches the specific number or more, the arrival effect is displayed in the special display mode. As a result, by linking the display mode of the OVER display with the display mode of the net increase number display, it is possible to visually inform the player whether the net increase number is less than "2000" or more than "2000".

Further, when the AT or bonus ends without the calculated net increase number reaching the OVER display number of "2000", the end screen is displayed in the normal mode as shown in FIG. 25 (h), whereas the calculation is performed. When the AT or bonus ends after the net increase has reached the OVER display number of "2000", it is less than or equal to "2000" as shown in FIGS. 26 (e) and 26 (e'). Regardless, the end screen is displayed in a rainbow mode. That is, the slot machine 1 includes a game result display means for displaying a game result including a net increase calculated by the net increase calculation means when the advantageous state ends, and the game result display means has the net increase. When the advantageous state ends without reaching the specific number, the game result is displayed in the predetermined display mode, and when the advantageous state ends after the net increase number reaches the specific number, the advantageous state ends. The game result is displayed in the special display mode regardless of whether or not the net increase number at the end of is reaching the specific number. As a result, by linking the display mode of the end screen with the display mode of the net increase number display, the end screen is different based on the net increase number at the end screen display even though the net increase number display is the rainbow mode. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may confuse the player by displaying with. Further, since it is not necessary to change the display mode of the end screen according to the net increase in the number of sheets when the end screen is displayed, the processing load at the time of displaying the end screen can be reduced.

Further, the display mode of the net increase number when the number of OVER display sheets of "2000" is reached is shown in FIG. 26 (b) regardless of whether the state at the time of reaching is AT, bonus, or confirmation screen display. As shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 28 (e), it is a common rainbow mode. That is, in the slot machine 1, the special display mode among the display modes of the net increase number is the same display mode regardless of the state when the net increase number reaches a specific number. As a result, it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the display data used for displaying the net increase number of sheets from being extremely increased after reaching the OVER display number of "2000".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 (b) to 26 (d), after the net increase number reaches the OVER display number of "2000" and the OVER display of "2000" is displayed, the net increase number is "2000". Even when "2000" is reached again after becoming less than, the OVER display of "2000" is not performed again, but after displaying the net increase number display in the rainbow mode, is it less than "2000"? Regardless of whether or not, the display in the rainbow mode is maintained. That is, the slot machine 1 includes a specific number arrival effect display means for displaying a specific number arrival effect when the net increase in the advantageous state reaches the specific number, and the specific number arrival effect display means is the net increase. After the number reaches the specific number and displays the specific number arrival effect, even when the net increase number becomes less than the specific number and reaches the specific number again, the specific number arrival effect is performed. Without redisplaying, the net increase display means determines whether or not the net increase is less than the specific number after the net increase reaches the specific number and the net increase is displayed in the special display mode. Regardless of this, the display in the special display mode is maintained. As a result, while preventing the OVER display of "2000" from occurring frequently in a short period of time, it is possible to reliably notify the player whether or not "2000" has been reached by the display mode of the net increase number display. ..

Further, as the display data used for displaying the net increase number of sheets, the display data in the normal mode and the display data in the rainbow mode are stored in the ROM 77 in advance. As for the display data of the OVER display, the display data of the normal mode in which the net increase number is less than "2000" and the display data of the rainbow mode in which the net increase number is "2000" or more are stored in advance in ROM 77, respectively. There is. Therefore, it is not necessary to generate display data of the rainbow mode by image processing, so that the burden of image processing can be reduced.

(5) As shown in FIG. 33 and the like, the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment displays a caution during the ending background display for the advantageous end of the state. However, as shown in FIG. 32, the caution display is performed in the layer having a higher priority than the ending background. In addition, the caution display is performed until a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being obstructed by the ending background.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 35 (c), (d), (g), (i), and the like, the navigation effect, the history display, and the like are displayed as specific displays even before the predetermined time for which the caution display is performed elapses. Dialogue display (first stage), error notification, etc. are performed. However, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the specific display is performed in an area that does not overlap with the area used for the caution display. Therefore, it is possible to perform the specific display while preventing the caution display from being hindered by the specific display. As a result, during the caution display, the player can visually recognize the caution display, so that the function of alerting the player can be fully exerted, and information according to the type of the specific display can be provided to the player or the clerk of the game hall. Can be reliably notified.

Further, since the suggestion display is an image that suggests the advantage of the slot machine 1, it is an image that attracts the player's attention. When the caution display and the suggestion display are displayed, as shown in FIGS. 33 to 35. , First, the suggestion display is performed, and then the caution display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the suggestion display from being overlooked by paying attention to the suggestion display as compared with the case where the caution display and the suggestion display are displayed at the same time. As a result, the player can fully exercise the function of calling attention by being able to visually recognize the caution display while the caution display is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved by suggesting the advantage by the suggestion display. Can be made to.

Further, when the advantageous state ends, the player has won a relatively large number of medals in the advantageous state. Attention is displayed during the ending background display under such circumstances. Therefore, the function of calling attention can be exerted in an effective situation.

Further, the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment starts the caution display as shown in FIG. 35 (c), and then ends the caution display as shown in FIGS. 35 (d) (g) and (i). Until then, the display mode (predetermined mode) from the beginning of the display is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being overlooked as compared with the case where the display mode of the caution display changes (movement of the display position, etc.) on the way.

Further, as shown in the timing 6 of FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment is assumed to have been operated (bet number setting, start switch 19 operation) for starting the game. However, the caution display is maintained until the predetermined time elapses. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being overlooked as compared with the case where the caution display is changed (movement of the display position, etc.) due to the acceptance of the game operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32 and the like, the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment is displayed in an area where the caution display and the suggestion display are different. Therefore, since the caution display is performed in an area different from the area where the suggestion display is performed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the display content has changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being overlooked.

(6) As shown in S700 and FIG. 9 of FIG. 5, the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment executes setting processing and the like related to AT on the main CPU 61 side. However, whether or not the main CPU 61 reaches the remaining upper limit game number by the time the remaining AT game number is consumed, as shown in the additional lottery column of SA04 and FIG. 37 of FIG. 9 during AT. Regardless of this, when the additional lottery conditions are met, the additional lottery will be performed uniformly. For example, even if the number of remaining AT games has already exceeded the maximum number of remaining AT games, when the additional lottery condition is satisfied, the additional lottery is performed in the same manner as when the number of remaining AT games does not exceed the maximum number of remaining AT games. I do. Further, when the upper limit of the advantageous period is reached, the AT and the advantageous period are terminated. As a result, the processing load and storage capacity on the main CPU 61 side are increased because there is no processing step for determining whether or not the maximum number of remaining AT games is reached before the remaining number of AT games is consumed. It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high by setting an upper limit on the AT and the advantageous period without causing the game.

On the other hand, on the sub CPU 71 side, a predetermined effect including an additional effect and a special background is controlled depending on whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games is reached by the time the remaining AT games are consumed. .. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect according to the game situation in the AT and the advantageous period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, as shown in FIG. 37 and the like, when the period controlled by the AT is actually extended, the additional effect is executed, and the period controlled by the AT is actually extended by reaching the upper limit number of advantageous periods. If it is not extended, the additional production will be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the AT ends when the upper limit of the advantageous period is reached even though the number of AT games notified by the additional effect has not been exhausted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 61 outputs an additional game number command, a remaining AT game number command, and a remaining upper limit game number command for each game. Further, the number of remaining AT games specified from the number of remaining AT games command includes the number of additional games added in the game. As a result, the sub CPU 71 side that receives the command determines whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous period is reached before the remaining AT games are consumed, including the number of additional games this time. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine the presence or absence of the additional effect.

Further, during the bonus controlled by winning the bonus before the end of AT, as described in SA01 and SA02 of FIG. 9, the number of remaining AT games is not subtracted and updated (consumed), while the remaining maximum number of games is not calculated. Subtract update (consumption). As a result, even if the bonus is controlled by the end of the AT, the period controlled by the AT is substantially shortened by being controlled by the bonus, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, since the upper limit of the advantageous period is not substantially extended, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

(7) In the slot machine 1 of the above embodiment, the player menu screen is terminated without the effect operation unit 81 being operated at a specific time during which the administrator menu screen is terminated without the effect operation unit 81 being operated. It is set shorter than the prescribed time to be allowed. For this reason, for example, when the administrator leaves the screen without any operation due to other work being performed while the administrator menu screen is being displayed, or when the administrator menu screen is being displayed, the amusement park is opened. Even if the player menu screen is displayed, the administrator menu screen can be closed at an earlier timing than when the player menu screen is displayed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will see the administrator menu screen that only the administrator should check and set. On the contrary, since the player menu screen is displayed longer than the administrator menu screen even if the production operation unit 81 is not operated, there is a relatively large margin while checking the game items at the player's pace. Can be set. That is, while it is possible to reduce the possibility that the administrator menu screen will be seen by the player, it is possible to provide a slot machine in which the display on the player menu screen can be confirmed with a margin.

Further, after the administrator menu screen is closed after a lapse of a specific time, the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 is controlled to the basic screen (black screen). In this way, the display state is controlled so that it is impossible to grasp or predict the management items displayed immediately before the administrator menu screen is closed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of what kind of management item the administrator was checking or trying to set.

In addition, when management items such as sub-clear and date / time settings are set on the administrator menu screen, the LCD will be displayed when the post-setting time specified for the set management items has elapsed after the completion screen is displayed. The display state of the display 27 is controlled to the basic screen (black screen). As a result, the completion screen will not be displayed indefinitely. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set management item from being specified by the player even after the management item is set on the administrator menu screen. In addition, the time after setting is set shorter than the specific time. Therefore, the possibility that the completion screen is specified by the player can be reduced.

In addition, the time after setting is set to be different according to the set management items. Therefore, the administrator menu screen can be closed after a lapse of time according to the type of the set management item. Further, as the post-setting time, a time corresponding to the time required for storing / processing the information of the setting item (for example, a time longer than the time required for storing / processing) is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the internal setting is not completed even though the completion screen is completed, and the administrator can be relieved by displaying the completion screen.

In addition, a completion screen is displayed when management items are set. This causes the trouble of reconfirming whether or not the administrator has been set, compared to the case where it is unclear whether or not the setting was possible because the completion screen is not displayed. Can be prevented.

In addition, the administrator who displays and sets the management items on the administrator menu screen generally manages a plurality of slot machines installed in the amusement park. For this reason, it can be expected that the management work will be an assembly line, and in this case, there is a risk that it will be unclear how many management items are set, whether the setting change process is completed, and the like. In consideration of such a situation, in the slot machine 1, the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 is different depending on whether the administrator menu screen is normally closed or closed after a lapse of a specific time. That is, in the slot machine 1, not only when the specific time elapses without the effect operation unit 81 being operated, but also after the start switch 19 is operated, the change processing start switch 56 is turned off and the setting change processing is completed. Sometimes the display of the administrator menu screen is finished. However, when the display of the administrator menu screen ends after a lapse of a specific time without operating the effect operation unit 81, the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 is controlled to be the basic screen (black screen). On the other hand, when the setting change process is completed, the demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. Therefore, even under the above-mentioned situation, by checking the display state of the liquid crystal display 27, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting change process is terminated and the administrator menu screen is normally terminated. .. As a result, although the administrator menu screen is closed, the change processing start switch 56 is not turned off and the setting change processing is not completed normally, and the game hall is opened. Can be prevented from occurring.

Further, since the administrator menu screen needs to be shifted to the setting change process as a premise, the player cannot easily check it. Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the display trigger and the end trigger of the player menu screen can be established by a common operation of operating the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81. On the other hand, no common operation is provided for the display trigger and the end trigger of the administrator menu screen. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator menu screen from being terminated due to an erroneous operation and reducing the management work efficiency.

Further, when the management item is set on the administrator menu screen, the screen always returns to the basic screen, but the display of the player menu screen is maintained even if the game item is set on the player menu screen. This reduces the possibility that the administrator menu screen will be seen by the player, while improving the convenience of the player by making it possible to continuously set other game items on the player menu screen. Can be done.

Further, when an error occurs on the sub CPU 71 side while the administrator menu screen is being displayed, the error notification is prioritized over the administrator menu screen. Therefore, while the administrator menu screen is being displayed, the management work can be continued without being affected by the error on the main CPU 61 side, while when an error occurs on the sub CPU 71 side that controls the display of the administrator menu screen itself, By prioritizing the error notification, it is possible to prevent the administrator menu screen from being continuously displayed with the possibility that the management items cannot be displayed or set normally.

<Modification example>
It should be considered that the above embodiments are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims. The changes to the embodiment are illustrated below.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the chance button effect is started when the start operation is detected to be ON or when the third stop operation is detected to be ON has been described. However, the chance button effect is not limited to this as long as it starts at at least one of the period from the start operation detection to the first stop operation detection and the period from the third stop operation detection to the bet number setting operation detection. For example, it may start in either the period from the start operation detection to the first stop operation detection or the period from the third stop operation detection to the bet number setting operation detection. Further, the chance button effect may be started when the start operation is detected as OFF or when the third stop operation is detected as OFF (when the pressing operation is completed), and the start operation or the third stop operation may be performed. 3 It may start when a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop operation is detected. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start operation or the third stop operation was detected, and the first stop operation after the start operation and the bet number setting operation after the third stop operation have already been detected, the chance button effect is displayed. It may be controlled not to start.

The chance button effect in the above-described embodiment and modified example has been described as an example of being executed in a game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied, that is, an example of being executed in the game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game (for example, a number of games) to execute the chance button effect may be determined and executed in the game. That is, whether or not to execute the chance button effect and the game to be executed may be determined in advance, and the chance button effect may be executed when the game is reached.

Once the chance button effect in the above-described embodiment and modification is started in the period from the start operation detection to the first stop operation detection and the period from the third stop operation detection to the bet number setting operation detection, the period elapses. An example has been described in which the execution is continued even after the operation is performed and the determination switch 81a is operated to terminate the operation. However, after the chance button effect is started, even if the decision switch 81a is not operated, the period from the start operation detection to the first stop operation detection or the period from the third stop operation detection to the bet number setting operation detection is long. It may be terminated by the end, a predetermined time elapses after the end of the period, a predetermined time elapses from the start of the chance button effect, and the like.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, one type is exemplified for each of the normal mode and the special mode as the mode of the chance button effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of the normal mode may be provided. Often, a plurality of types of special embodiments may be provided. Further, although the example in which the start timing of the chance button effect is started at a common timing (for example, the timing when the target operation is detected to be ON) regardless of the mode is described, the mode of the chance button effect is not limited to this. It may be started at different timings depending on the situation. For example, the start timing of the chance button effect in the normal mode is started when the target operation is detected to be ON, whereas the start timing of the chance button effect in the special mode is OFF. It may be started at the detected timing.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, as a pattern of continuous effect, an example in which the chance button effect is performed twice during one continuous effect has been described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. However, the pattern of the continuous effect may include a pattern in which the chance button effect is performed once during one continuous effect, or a pattern in which the chance button effect is performed three or more times. When the chance button effect is performed a plurality of times during the continuous effect, it is sufficient that the chance button effect for executing the winning suggestion effect is not executed after the chance button effect for executing the winning notification effect is executed. For example, the pattern is not limited to the pattern configured such that the chance button effect for executing the winning notification effect is executed after the chance button effect for executing the winning suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17. It may include a pattern composed only of a chance button effect for executing a winning suggestion effect, or a pattern composed only of a chance button effect for executing a winning notification effect. Further, when the chance button effect is performed a plurality of times during the continuous effect, the chance button effect in the normal mode may not be executed after the chance button effect in the special mode is executed. For example, FIG. As shown, only the pattern of executing only the chance button effect of the normal mode, the pattern of executing the chance button effect of the special mode after executing the chance button effect of the normal mode, and the chance button effect of the special mode as shown in FIG. May include a pattern that executes.

Further, an example in which the type and timing of the chance button effect executed during the continuous effect is predetermined according to the pattern of the continuous effect has been described. However, the type and timing of the chance button effect executed during the continuous effect is not limited to this, and whether or not the chance button effect is executed when the start operation is detected during the continuous effect or when the third stop operation is detected. A lottery may be performed for the type of execution, and the chance button effect may be executed according to the lottery result. Even in this case, if the chance button effect is performed a plurality of times during the continuous effect, the chance button effect for executing the win suggestion effect is not executed after the chance button effect for executing the win notification effect is executed. In addition, a lottery related to the chance button effect may be executed so that the chance button effect of the normal mode is not executed after the chance button effect of the special aspect is executed.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the end telop is displayed and the net increase number is hidden when it is determined in SB12 of FIG. 19 that the cumulative number is 2370 or more has been described. However, not limited to this, for example, even if the cumulative number reaches 2370 or more, the net increase number is continuously displayed, and when the cumulative number reaches the upper limit cumulative number (2400), the update display of the net increase number is stopped. Also, the update display of the net increase number may be stopped when the cumulative number becomes equal to or more than the value reaching the upper limit cumulative number (2400) when the maximum payout number of one game is added, for example. Further, not limited to the cumulative number, the update display of the net increase may be stopped when the displayed net increase itself reaches the upper limit cumulative number (2400), and the displayed net increase itself is, for example, 1. When the maximum payout number of games is added, the update display of the net increase number may be stopped when the value reaches the upper limit cumulative number (2400) or more. Further, when the update display of the net increase number is stopped, an image (for example, "OVER") indicating that the layer has a higher priority than the layer displaying the net increase and the upper limit is reached in the area overlapping the net increase A message image such as "LIMIT") may be displayed.

FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining a display example when the update display of the net increase number is stopped by reaching the upper limit cumulative number. FIG. 50A shows a state in which both the cumulative number and the net increase number during AT have reached "2396". Note that FIG. 50 (a) shows an example in which the cumulative number and the net increase number are the same value, but the cumulative number is not limited to this, and when the maximum payout number of one game is added, the upper limit cumulative number ( As long as the value reaches 2400), the net increase number may be another value (for example, "1600"). In FIG. 50 (b), in the game after the bet number is set in the state shown in FIG. 50 (a), the total number and the net increase number are added by winning a small winning combination and adding the maximum payout number of one game. Shows an example of display when both reach the maximum cumulative number. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the update of the net increase number is stopped at "2400", and a message image such as "OVER" is displayed in the layer having a higher priority than the net increase number display. As a result, it is possible to prevent a numerical value exceeding the upper limit of the cumulative number "2400" (the value obtained by adding the maximum number of payouts of one game to 2400) from being displayed as a net increase, and to indicate that the upper limit of the cumulative number has been reached. Can be notified.

In addition, when the update display of the net increase number is stopped due to the cumulative number or the net increase number reaching the upper limit cumulative number, the display mode of the net increase number is changed (for example, the display color of the image is different (grayout, etc.)). It may be. FIG. 50 (c) shows a display example when the display mode of the net increase number of sheets is changed to a semi-transparent mode (shown lightly in FIG. 50 (c)). In this way, even if the cumulative number is 2370 or more and the net increase is continuously displayed, the end telop may be displayed when it is determined that the cumulative number is 2370 or more. , The end telop itself may not be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the number-unrelated production data among the production data may be carried over until the game is digested 100 times after the end of the advantageous period, and may be carried over after that on condition that the AT is won within the period. I explained an example that can be done. However, the period for carrying over the number-unrelated production data is not limited to the period for digesting the game 100 times. Further, the conditions for carrying over even after the period for carrying over the number of sheets unrelated production data is not limited to the AT winning within the period, for example, the AT is won and controlled by the AT within the period, and the said It may be controlled again in the advantageous period within the period, controlled in the advantageous period within the period, and controlled by the CZ.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, the game history data for mobile interlocking has been continuously updated and carried over without being initialized until the mobile interlocking is completed. However, not limited to this, the game history data for mobile interlocking may also have a carry-over period, as in the case of the number-of-number-related non-related effect data. The game history data for mobile interlocking may also be carried over from the end of the advantageous period until the game is digested 100 times. In addition, the conditions for carrying over the game history data for mobile interlocking even after the elapse of the period are, for example, that the AT is won within the period, that the AT is won and controlled by the AT within the period, and that the period is controlled. It may be controlled again in the advantageous period within the period, controlled in the advantageous period within the period, and controlled by the CZ.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which a confirmation screen is displayed by winning the RBB has been described. However, when the RBB is won during the end telop display, the end telop display may be continued without displaying the confirmation screen, the confirmation screen may be displayed while continuing the end telop display, and the end telop display is ended. The confirmation screen may be displayed. Further, when the condition for displaying the end telop is satisfied during the confirmation screen display, the confirmation screen display may be terminated and the end telop may be displayed, or the confirmation screen display may be continued and the end telop may be displayed. Good. Further, on the confirmation screen, an example of notifying the winning RBB symbol (also referred to as winning RBB notification) in FIG. 27 (b) has been described, but the display area of the winning RBB notification is one of the display areas of the end telop. It may be superposed on the part. Even in this case, both the display of the end telop and the display of the winning RBB notification may be displayed so that the player can recognize or identify them.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which the OVER display is not executed even when the net increase number reaches the set OVER display number during the end telop display has been described. However, even when the end telop is being displayed and the net increase is not displayed, the corresponding OVER display is executed when the internally updated net increase reaches the set OVER display number. You may try to do it. As shown in FIG. 20, since the number of OVER display sheets is determined to be less than 2400, even if the OVER display is executed, the net increase number of 2400 or more is not displayed.

In the above-described embodiment and modification, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the end telop based on the cumulative number is displayed, the net increase number is hidden, but the number of AT games is continuously displayed. An example of displaying is described. However, when the end telop based on the cumulative number is displayed, not only the net increase number but also the number of AT games may be hidden. That is, when displaying the end telop, it is possible not to display any information related to the progress of the game. Further, when displaying the end telop based on the number of games, the net increase number may be hidden, or both the net increase number and the AT game number may be hidden.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, the example in which the ending telop is displayed continuously until the end of the advantageous period once the display is started has been described. However, when the RBB is won and the RBB is started during the end telop display, the end telop display may be ended and the effect corresponding to the RBB may be started.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which the AT is controlled only once in one advantageous period, and when the AT ends, the advantageous period is also terminated and controlled in the normal period has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the AT may be able to be controlled a plurality of times in one advantageous period. For example, after the end of AT, it is controlled to CZ, and it is controlled to AT again by winning AT in the CZ, while it is advantageous period when the number of games that can be controlled to CZ is exhausted without winning AT in CZ. May be terminated to control during the normal period. Further, when the AT can be controlled a plurality of times in one advantageous period, for example, the period for carrying over the number-of-sheet unrelated effect data is 100 times after the AT ends even within the one advantageous period. It may be limited to the period of digestion. That is, when the AT is not controlled again from the end of the AT to the end of the game 100 times, the number-unrelated effect data may not be carried over even within one advantageous period.

In the above-described embodiment and modification, the end telop display based on the cumulative number ends when the cumulative number exceeds 2400. That is, the end telop display is not ended in advance. For example, if the total number of cards to be paid out (12 cards) in one game exceeds 2400 and the end telop display ends when the game in which "BEL" is won is started, the player's operation Depending on the mode, the cumulative number may not exceed 2400, and it becomes necessary to display the end telop again. It is possible to prevent such useless processing from being performed and display that makes the user feel uncomfortable. The end telop display based on the cumulative number is the cumulative number exceeding 2400 when the maximum number of payouts (12) in one game is added, and when it is confirmed that the game will be operated by the correct answer procedure in the game in which "BEL" is won. It may end with, or the display mode may be changed when it is confirmed that the operation is performed according to the correct answer procedure (switch to a message such as "The upper limit of the advantageous period of 2400 sheets has been reached"). Further, the end telop display may be terminated after changing the display mode, for example, when the cumulative number exceeds 2400. For example, during the end telop display, when the cumulative number exceeds 2400, the end telop display may be terminated after switching to a message such as "The upper limit of the advantageous period of 2400 has been reached". Further, the end telop may end when the third stop operation is separated in the game in which the end condition is satisfied.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, in SB55 of FIG. 36, an example in which a special background is set when the number of remaining AT games is equal to or greater than the number of remaining upper limit games has been described. However, the condition for setting the special background is to replace or add to this by multiplying the number of remaining AT games by the average net increase in the number of games per game in AT calculated from the winning probability of the winning combination. Calculate the "predicted net increase", determine whether the "predicted net increase" is greater than or equal to "(upper limit 2400)-(cumulative number at the present time)", and determine "predicted net increase" ≥ "(upper limit 2400)". )-(Cumulative number at the present time) ”, it may be shifted to SB58 and a special background may be set.

In the above-described embodiment and modification, when the RBB wins and is controlled by the RBB during the display of the end telop based on the cumulative number, the end telop display may be terminated when controlled by the RBB, or during the RBB. The end telop display may be ended when the advantageous period ends. Further, in the RBB, as shown in FIG. 24, even when the end telop is displayed, the information regarding the net increase in the number of sheets in the RBB is displayed, but when the end telop is displayed. Information on the net increase in the number of sheets in the RBB may not be displayed. In addition, an example of displaying information on the net increase in the number of sheets in the RBB on the end screen when the controlled RBB ends during the display of the end telop based on the cumulative number has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Information on the net increase in the number of sheets may not be displayed on the end screen.

When displaying the end telop based on the cumulative number in the above embodiment and the modified example, a notice effect indicating the possibility that the end telop may be displayed may be executed. As the advance notice effect, for example, a message such as "may reach the upper limit of 2400 soon" may be displayed. Further, the advance notice effect may be executed, for example, when the current cumulative number reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2350) that is smaller than the cumulative number value that triggers the display of the end telop. As a result, the possibility that the end telop is displayed can be notified, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. Further, the effect of the same mode as the advance notice effect may be executed by winning in a predetermined lottery even when the cumulative number is less than a predetermined value. As a result, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that the advantageous period may end when the upper limit is reached when the effect of the same mode as the advance notice effect is executed.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, the example in which the value that triggers the display of the end telop based on the cumulative number is uniformly set to 2370 has been described. However, the value that triggers the display of the end telop based on the cumulative number is from a plurality of values (for example, 2000, 2100, 2200, 2300, 2370, etc.) each time it is controlled during the advantageous period or each time it is controlled by the AT. It may be decided by a random number lottery. Regardless of which value is determined, the display mode (message content, etc.) of the end telop may be the same mode. As a result, even after the end telop is displayed, the value up to the upper limit is different, so that the AT can be expected to continue.

In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment and the modified example, an example of initializing the effect data and the game history data stored by the advantageous period, the end of the mobile phone interlocking, or the like has been described. However, the slot machine 1 may update the analysis data for identifying all the game histories performed in the slot machine 1, in addition to the effect data and the game history data. The analysis data is, for example, data that a manufacturer or the like collects the slot machine 1 and uses it only for analysis, and cannot be used for the progress of the game of the slot machine 1 or the execution of the effect.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example used when determining the type and content of the effect to be executed during the next advantageous period or AT has been described based on the number of sheets unrelated effect data carried over after the end of the advantageous period. However, not only during the next advantageous period or AT, but also based on the number of sheets unrelated effect data carried over after the end of the advantageous period, the type and content of the effect to be executed in the normal period, the advantageous general, and CZ are determined. May be good.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which the number-of-sheet unrelated effect data is carried over after the end of the advantageous period has been described. However, the number-unrelated effect data may be carried over after the end of the advantage period only when the game history in the end advantage period satisfies the special condition. The special condition may be a condition that is satisfied, for example, when the story reaches up to 15 episodes, the premium effect is executed, and the net increase number is a predetermined number (for example, 500) or more.

In the above-described embodiment and modification, an example in which the game history data for mobile interlocking is not used when determining the type and content of the effect to be executed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect data is not limited to this. Not only that, the type and content of the effect to be executed may be determined using the game history data for interlocking with mobile phones.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which the net increase number of sheets is hidden according to the display of the end telop has been described, but it is not limited to the case of hiding, for example, the display mode is changed to display the net increase number of sheets. It may be the one that displays the item image or the like corresponding to the net increase in the number of sheets.

In the above-described embodiment and modification, an example of determining the content of the effect to be executed during the next advantageous period (AT) according to the number of sheets unrelated effect data that is not initialized by the end of the advantageous period has been described. The target of the effect to be determined is not limited to the display effect executed by displaying on the liquid crystal display 27, but may be a light effect executed by a lamp or an LED, and is a sound effect output from the speakers 31L and 31R. There may be.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which the number of stories is increased according to the progress of the game has been described as an effect during AT. However, the production during AT is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a production in which a fighting battle is performed and the number of rounds advances according to the progress of the game, and when a special condition is satisfied (the net increase is 2000). It may be such that the ending effect that is executed only when the number of AT games reaches 1000, etc. is executed. In such a case, the data that specifies the number of rounds and the presence / absence of execution of the ending effect is updated as the number of sheets unrelated effect data, and after the advantageous period ends, the effect according to the number of rounds and the presence / absence of the ending effect. May be executed. For example, when the ending effect is being executed, an image imitating a trophy may be displayed during AT in the next advantageous period.

In FIG. 31 in the above embodiment and the modified example, an example of displaying the AT net increase number itself on the display unit of the communication terminal owned by the player based on the game history data for interlocking with the mobile phone has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. An image corresponding to the net increase in the number of ATs (for example, one dollar box image corresponding to 100 images) may be displayed.

(A) Case of carrying over production data having a direct relationship with medals In the above embodiment, the cumulative number of "2400" is the upper limit of the total number of sheets to be increased during the advantageous period notified on the liquid crystal display 27 or the like. In order not to notify more than the value obtained by adding the maximum number of payouts for one game to "", it ends when the upper limit of the cumulative number during the advantageous period is soon reached (the cumulative number reaches "2370"). An example has been described in which a telop is displayed and production data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period is initialized in SB46 of FIG. 23 each time the advantageous period ends. However, this is not limited to the case where the value obtained by adding the maximum number of payouts for one game to the upper limit of the cumulative number of "2400" is not notified, for example, when the advantageous period ends. However, the production data (for example, cumulative number, net increase number, etc.) that is directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period may be carried over to the subsequent stage without being initialized. , The type and content of the effect to be executed may be determined based on the effect data and executed. For example, when the cumulative number (or net increase) in the advantageous period has not reached "2400" (or "2370"), the production data has a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period. (For example, the cumulative number, the net increase number, etc.) may be carried over to the subsequent stage without being initialized. Even in this case, as shown by SB47 and SB48 in FIG. 23, when the game is completed 100 times without winning the AT from the end of the previous advantageous period, the production data inherited from the previous advantageous period is initialized. However, it may not be reflected in the subsequent production by not carrying it over. In the following, an example of inheriting the production data that is directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period will be described.

-Example of reflecting on the net increase number display An example of inheriting the net increase number during the previous advantageous period will be explained. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining an example of an increase / decrease in the cumulative number counter and the net increase in the number of sheets during the advantageous period. In FIG. 51, the vertical axis shows the type of controlled period, the cumulative number counter, the end telop, the net increase number, and the slump graph graphing the net increase number from the top, and the horizontal axis shows the slump graph from the left. The passage of time (digesting the game) is shown to the right. In FIG. 51, after the end of the first advantageous period (referred to as the first advantageous period in FIG. 51), when a predetermined period elapses, the advantageous period is again referred to as the second advantageous period (referred to as the second advantageous period in FIG. 51). The case of being controlled by) is shown as an example.

First, when controlled from the normal period to the advantageous period (first advantageous period), as shown in SA01 of FIG. 9 and SA12 and SA14 of FIG. 11, the advantageous period counter and the cumulative number counter are countered according to the progress of the game. The value of is updated. The first advantageous period of FIG. 51 shows an example of being controlled by the advantageous period and being controlled by the AT. When controlled by AT (net increase number calculation period), the net increase number is updated according to the progress of the game, as shown in SB03 of FIG. 18 and SB10 of FIG. During AT, for example, since the navigation effect is executed when the push order bell is won, the value of the cumulative number counter increases, and the net increase number and the net increase number as shown in the slump graph also increase. Further, during AT, as shown in SB06 of FIG. 18 and SB22 of FIG. 19, the net increase number is updated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

In FIG. 51, when the game is digested 500 times and the cumulative number and the net increase number reach "900" according to the subsequent progress of the game, the first advantageous period ends and the normal period is controlled. The case is shown. When the first advantageous period ends, the game data during the first advantageous period is initialized, but the SB45 and SB46 in FIG. 23 are not processed, so that the data is paid out during the first advantageous period. The effect data (effect data managed on the sub CPU 71 side) including the effect data directly related to the number of medals is inherited thereafter. The production data including the production data that is directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period, provided that the cumulative number (or net increase) has not reached the upper limit of "2400". When the cumulative number (or net increase) reaches the upper limit of "2400", the production data that is directly related to the number of medals paid out at least during the advantageous period will be displayed later. You may not take over.

In FIG. 51, it is assumed that the control is performed again in the advantageous period (referred to as the second advantageous period in FIG. 24) from the control in the normal period to the digestion of the predetermined number of times (100) games. In this modification, the net increase in the number of cards inherited from the first advantageous period is updated according to the progress of the game even in the normal period. In the second advantageous period, it is controlled by AT after being controlled by advantageous general and CZ for a predetermined period. If controlled during the advantageous period, the values of the advantageous period counter and the cumulative number counter are newly updated according to the progress of the game even if the net increase number is taken over. Even if it is controlled during the advantageous period, since the navigation effect is not executed during the advantageous general or CZ, the cumulative number counter becomes 0 or a negative value, and "0" is set as shown by SA16 in FIG. In addition, as shown in the slump graph, the net increase in the number of sheets also decreases in the advantageous general and during CZ as in the normal period.

In the second advantageous period of FIG. 51, it is assumed that the AT is controlled after passing through the general advantage and CZ. When controlled by the AT, the net increase number is updated and displayed from the net increase number taken over from the first advantageous period. It should be noted that the net increase number inherited from the first advantageous period may be updated and displayed by winning the AT or controlling the AT from the control in the normal period to the digestion of the predetermined number of times (100) games. In FIG. 51, since 150 medals are consumed and controlled by the AT from the end of the first advantageous period, the net increase number is updated and displayed from "750" (= 900-150) on the liquid crystal display 27.

In FIG. 51, when the cumulative number in the advantageous period does not reach the upper limit and the net increase number taken over and updated from the first advantageous period exceeds, for example, "2090" according to the progress of the subsequent game. The case where the value of the advantageous period counter becomes 5 or less is shown. When the value of the advantageous period counter becomes 5 or less, the corresponding end telop is displayed as shown by SB12 to SB13 in FIG. If the end telop is displayed according to the value of the advantageous period counter, the update display of the net increase number is continued. The end telop is displayed until the number of games in the second advantageous period reaches the upper limit of 1500 and ends.

When the value of the advantageous period counter reaches 0, the first condition is satisfied, and the second advantageous period ends, the game data during the second advantageous period is initialized, while the SB45 in FIG. 23 is used. Since the processing of SB46 and SB46 is not performed, the effect data from the first advantageous period is taken over thereafter. Further, after the second advantageous period ends, since it is controlled in the normal period, the navigation effect is not executed even if the push order bell is won. Therefore, the net increase number does not continuously increase as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 51, but decreases as the game progresses as shown by the solid line.

In this way, when the net increase in the number of sheets during the advantageous period is taken over, the net increase in the number of sheets can be updated and displayed even during the next advantageous period. Even in this case, the net increase reaches, for example, "2370" so that the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to the upper limit of the cumulative number "2400" is not displayed as the net increase. At that time, the net increase number may be hidden, or the net increase number may be hidden and a special effect may be executed. Even after the net increase number reaches "2370", the sub CPU 71 updates the net increase number according to the progress of the game. FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining an example of a special effect.

When the net increase reaches "2370", as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the net increase displayed in the upper right area of the liquid crystal display 27 is hidden, and "Congratulations!" As a special effect. May be displayed. Further, when the net increase number reaches "3000", a message such as "Congratulations!" May be displayed as a special effect as shown in FIG. 52 (b). Other special effects may include a message such as "wonderful!". In addition, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of separately calculating the net increase number during the controlled AT during the currently controlled advantageous period, and is currently controlled when a special effect is executed with the net increase number hidden. Only the net increase in the number of sheets during the AT during the advantageous period may be displayed.

-Example of reflecting on the production other than the net increase number display In Fig. 51, the example of taking over the net increase number from the previous advantageous period and reflecting it on the net increase number in the next advantageous period was explained, but it is reflected in the net increase number itself. Not limited to this, for example, an effect corresponding to the inherited net increase number of sheets (hereinafter, also referred to as a net increase number number corresponding effect) may be executed during the next advantageous period. FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect corresponding to the net increase in the number of sheets.

FIG. 53 shows an example of a display screen during AT controlled in the next advantageous period in a state where "250" sheets are taken over as the net increase number in the previous advantageous period. As the effect corresponding to the net increase number of sheets, for example, the image of the ◎ mark is used, and the ◎ mark is displayed for the number of quotients obtained by dividing the inherited net increase number of sheets by 100. In FIG. 53, since the quotient is 2 (= 250/100), two ◎ marks are displayed. That is, it is displayed as one mark on 100 sheets. This makes it possible to get an estimate of the net increase in the number of sheets during the previous advantageous period. As in FIG. 51, the net increase in the number of sheets inherited from the previous advantageous period is continuously updated even in the normal period, etc., and in the AT during the next advantageous period, the net increase in the number of continuously updated sheets is increased. The mark may be displayed. In any case, the net increase in the number of ATs during this advantageous period may be displayed separately from the ◎ mark as shown in FIG. 53 as “TOTAL: 15”. Further, the display of the net increase number may be performed by using such a mark instead of a concrete number.

-Example of reflecting on the end screen of the advantageous period, etc. In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 25 (h) and 29 (d), as the end screen when the AT ends and the advantageous period ends, This time, an example of displaying game history information including the number of AT games and the net increase in the number of AT games during the advantageous period has been described. However, the game history information displayed on the end screen is not limited to the game history during the advantageous period this time. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the end screen.

When the controlled AT ends from the end of the previous advantageous period to the end of the game 100 times, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the game history information during the previous advantageous period is displayed as << previous result >>. May be displayed, and the game history information during the advantageous period of this time may be displayed as << result of this time >>.

Even when the end screen is displayed in this way, when the cumulative number reaches "2370" according to the progress of the game during each advantageous period, the net increase number is hidden as described in FIG. 29 and the like. However, the end telop may be displayed, and the net increase number may not be displayed as the game history information on the end screen after the end telop is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification of a value or more obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to the upper limit value of the cumulative number "2400" as the net increase number (TOTAL).

As another example of the end screen, when the game history during the current advantageous period or the game history obtained by adding the game history during the previous advantageous period satisfies the specific conditions, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the game It is also possible to display a special end screen such as displaying a message such as "Completion achievement Congratulations!" In the background of the rainbow mode without notifying the detailed information of the history. The specific condition is, for example, the maximum number of one game against "2400", which is the upper limit of the total number of net additions in the game history during the current advantageous period or the total game history during the previous advantageous period. It must be equal to or greater than the sum of the number of payouts, and the end telop displayed during the advantageous period (including both the end telop displayed when the maximum number of games is reached and the end telop displayed when the maximum number of games is reached). May be included, which is satisfied by the fact that is displayed, the story has evolved to the final episode, and so on.

-Example of reflecting on the game screen during mobile interlocking FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining an example of the game screen during mobile interlocking. During the mobile interlocking, the effect may be executed according to the net increase in the number of sheets during the advantageous period. FIG. 55A shows an example of a screen after the net increase number reaches “1000” and the OVER display is performed during the mobile interlocking. After the OVER display is performed, a message such as "acquisition!" May be displayed in a pop-up below the net increase number display of the liquid crystal display 27.

Further, during the mobile interlocking, the production data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the previous advantageous period may be taken over and reflected on the game screen. FIG. 55B shows an example of a screen when the total net increase number taken over from the previous advantageous period and updated reaches "2000" during the AT of the next advantageous period. Even if the net increase in the number of sheets during the AT of this advantageous period is relatively small at "120", when the total net increase in the number of sheets inherited from the previous advantageous period reaches "2000", the liquid crystal display 27 A message such as "acquisition!" May be displayed in a pop-up below the net increase number display.

(B) Modification example regarding OVER display (a) Net increase number non-display period in net increase number calculation period In the above embodiment, a confirmation screen is exemplified as a net increase number non-display period in which the net increase number is not displayed although it is a net increase number calculation period. Then, when the net increase number reaches "2000" in the confirmation screen and the winning RBB is won and the bonus is started, as shown in FIG. 28, the net increase number and the OVER display are displayed. Was once displayed in the normal mode, and then the net increase number and the OVER display are displayed in the rainbow mode when the net increase number reaches "2000" at the time of the first medal payout. Similarly, when the net increase number reaches "2000" in the net increase number non-display period different from the confirmation screen display, and the net increase number is controlled during the period for displaying the net increase number, the net increase number is displayed in the normal mode. After displaying once, if the net increase number reaches "2000" even at the time of the first medal payout, the net increase number may be displayed in the rainbow mode. For example, in a CZ that does not display the net increase number, if the net increase number reaches "2000" and the AT is won again during the CZ and is controlled by the AT, the net increase number is once displayed in the normal mode. After that, if the net increase number reaches "2000" even at the time of the first medal payout, the net increase number and the OVER display may be displayed in a rainbow mode. As a result, the net increase number is not suddenly displayed in the rainbow mode at the moment when the net increase number display is resumed, so that it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that may mislead the player or cause confusion. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, once the rainbow flag is set in SB20, the net increase number and the OVER display are displayed in the rainbow mode until the end of the advantageous period regardless of the subsequent net increase number. However, in a gaming machine designed so that the game is played for a relatively long time in the net increase number non-display period, after the net increase number display etc. is displayed in the rainbow mode, the net increase number display period such as CZ is set. , It is expected that the net increase number will decrease significantly during the net increase number non-display period, and in this case, when the net increase number display is restarted, the net increase number will not reach "2000" significantly (for example, 1900 etc.). In some cases. Even in such a case, if the net increase number or the like is displayed in the rainbow mode as shown in the above embodiment, only the net increase number display or the like is displayed in the rainbow mode even though the net increase number does not reach "2000" significantly. If it is displayed as, there is a risk that the player will be in a bad mood. In order to solve such a problem, for example, even when the net increase number reaches "2000" once, the net increase number becomes a predetermined value within a predetermined range with respect to "2000" in the subsequent progress of the game. For example, when it becomes less than "1950"), the rainbow flag may be reset so that the net increase number display or the like is not performed in the rainbow mode until "2000" is reached again. As a result, for example, even after the net increase number reaches "2000" and is displayed in the rainbow mode, the net increase number decreases as the game progresses, and the net increase number becomes less than the predetermined value ("1950"). When this happens, the net increase in the number of sheets is displayed in a normal manner, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences such as impairing the mood of the player. Even when the rainbow flag is reset, the number of OVER display sheets may be maintained as it is without being reset, or the number of OVER display sheets of "2000" may be reset. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, as the net increase number calculation period, a predetermined end condition is set by ending the advantageous period (including CZ and AT) after the ART is started while being controlled by the AT and controlled by the advantageous RT. The period until it is established is illustrated. However, the net increase number calculation period is not limited to this as long as it includes a state in which the payout rate exceeds 1, for example, it is determined by the end of the advantageous period after the AT is won and the control to the AT is started. It may be a period until the end condition of is satisfied. Further, even if the payout rate does not exceed 1, it may be a period from when the AT winning is announced until the predetermined end condition is satisfied by the end of the advantageous period, and it is advantageous after the AT start is announced. It may be a period from the end of the period until the predetermined end condition is satisfied.

(B) Advantageous State and Special State In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, AT is exemplified as an advantageous state and a bonus is exemplified as a special state, but the advantageous state and the special state are not limited to this, respectively. For example, it may be in an advantageous state for the player, such as RT in which the winning probability of the re-game combination is improved.

(C) Net increase number calculation period An example is shown in which the start trigger of the net increase number calculation period in the above embodiment is established by being controlled by ART. However, the trigger for starting the net increase number calculation period is not limited to this, and may be established by being controlled by, for example, a bonus, or by being controlled by either ART or a bonus. It may be a thing. In addition, the end trigger of the net increase number calculation period is shown in the example where it is established when the advantageous period ends, but it is not limited to this, and it may be established when it is not controlled by the AT after the end of the bonus. , AT may end (the number of AT games becomes 0), or the game may be played a predetermined number of times (for example, 30) after the advantageous period ends.

(D) Predetermined display mode and special display mode In the above embodiment, as the predetermined display mode, a normal mode mainly composed of red characters and the like common to each of the net increase number display, the OVER display, and the end screen is illustrated. However, the predetermined display mode does not have to be a common mode for each of the net increase number display, the OVER display, and the end screen as long as it is a normal display mode, and different modes (for example, the net increase number display is red characters, OVER). The display may be defined with pink characters, and the end screen may be defined with silver characters, etc.). Further, as a special display mode, a rainbow mode mainly composed of characters having a rainbow pattern common to each of the net increase number display, the OVER display, and the end screen is illustrated. However, the special display mode may be a mode different from the predetermined display mode, and does not have to be a common mode in each of the net increase number display, the OVER display, and the end screen, and different modes (for example, the net increase number display is a rainbow pattern). Characters, OVER display may be floral characters, end screen may be gold characters, etc.). As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the display modes of the net increase number display, the OVER display, and the end screen.

In addition, the special display mode is a mode used in other game effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game, and the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the game effect is executed in the other modes. May be in a mode defined to be high. Here, as a game effect, an effect for notifying the possibility of winning an AT or a bonus, and an example of a possibility notification effect that can be executed by any one of a plurality of types including a rainbow mode. When the possibility notification effect is executed in the rainbow mode, it may be set so that the possibility of winning the AT or the bonus is higher than when it is executed in the other mode. As a result, regardless of the type of production, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and superiority when executed in the special display mode.

Further, as the special display mode, one mode of the rainbow mode has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types may be defined (for example, a rainbow mode, a floral pattern mode, an animal pattern mode, etc.). Further, the net increase number display may be set so that the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on which of the plurality of types of special display modes is used. The degree of advantage for the player includes, for example, the level of the set value set and the large number of AT games that have not yet been notified. For example, when the net increase number reaches "2000" and is displayed in the rainbow mode as the special display mode, it is possible that a higher setting value is set than when the flower pattern mode is displayed as the special display mode. May be higher. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to which special display mode the net increase number display is performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(E) End screen In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (e) and the like, in the end screen in the special display mode, not only the net increase number but also other game results such as the number of AT games are displayed in the rainbow mode. An example of displaying in is explained. However, on the end screen in the special display mode, only the net increase number may be displayed in the rainbow mode, and the other game results may be displayed in the normal mode. Further, the end screen may be displayed in a normal mode (see FIG. 25 (h)) regardless of whether or not the rainbow flag is set.

(F) Specific number to be a special display mode In the above embodiment, an example in which a net increase number of sheets "2000" is defined as a specific number has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "1500", "2200", etc. are used. It may be defined. Further, an example in which one value is set as a specific number has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of values (1500, 2000, 2200) are set, and the net increase number display reaches any net increase number. It may be defined so that the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether or not the special display mode is used. For example, when the net increase number reaches "2200" and is displayed in the special display mode, a higher setting value may be set than when the net increase number reaches "2000" and is displayed in the special display mode. The sex may be increased. As a result, the player can pay attention to the timing when the net increase number is displayed in the special display mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(C) Modification Example Regarding Caution Display In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, an ending effect is performed from the start of the final game in an advantageous state to the start of the next game, and the predetermined ending effect is determined. An example of displaying a caution from the timing until a predetermined time elapses has been described. In addition, if the operation for starting the next game is performed early, the ending effect will end at that point, but the caution display will continue, so the caution display will be displayed across the next game. Can be done. However, the ending effect may be performed during the wait period (hereinafter, also referred to as the ending wait period) by generating a wait that stops the progress of the game. That is, during the ending effect, even if an operation for advancing the game is performed, the ending effect may be continued without being effectively accepted. Further, the ending wait period (5 seconds) is set longer than the predetermined time (3 seconds) for displaying the caution. As a result, the caution display may be completed during the ending wait period. Further, the suggestion display may be performed before or after the caution display as long as it is performed during a period other than the period during which the caution display is performed during the ending effect.

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, as a background image, an example in which one type is defined according to a game state or the like has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types may be defined. .. For example, as an ending background for AT termination to display a caution, a background image in which the shutter of the camera is closed and a background image in which treasure is overflowing from the treasure box are provided, and one of these is AT terminated. It may be displayed as an ending background for. For example, the sub CPU 71 may determine which ending background is to be displayed according to the net increase in the number of sheets during AT by a random number lottery. Even when a plurality of types of backgrounds are defined, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), a layer having a higher priority than the layer on which the background is displayed regardless of which background is displayed. Anything that displays a caution in. As a result, no matter which background is displayed, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being obstructed by the background.

The gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modified example may further have the following configuration. The gaming machine executes a movable member effect that can change a movable member that can be changed to a position that overlaps the display area and a position that does not overlap the display area, and the movable member that is changed in a plurality of stages so that the area that overlaps the display area increases. The movable member effect controlling means for controlling the movement is provided, and the area where the movable member changes by a predetermined stage in the movable member effect does not overlap with the area where the caution image is displayed, and the movable member effect The region where the movable member changes after the predetermined step overlaps with the region where the caution image can be displayed. According to this configuration, even when the caution image is displayed, the player can visually recognize the change of the movable member up to a predetermined stage in the movable member effect, so that the caution image is displayed without impairing the playability. be able to. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given. For example, the sub CPU 71 includes a movable member that can be changed to a position that overlaps with the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 and a position that does not overlap at all, and the sub CPU 71 moves the movable member of the liquid crystal display 27 when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. The movable member effect may be executed by driving and controlling the movable member so that the area overlapping the display area increases over a plurality of stages (three stages). The predetermined effect condition is satisfied, for example, when the "CH" combination is won in the first game after the end of the advantageous state.

Further, in the first stage of the movable member effect, the position changes to a position overlapping only the region 1 shown in FIG. 32 (a), for example, as in the dialogue display, and in the second and subsequent stages, it is shown in FIG. The area 2 may be changed to a position overlapping the area where the caution display is performed. Even in this case, the movable member effect of the second and subsequent stages is performed when the next game is started after the game in which the first stage drive control is performed is completed, as in the case of the dialogue display. .. As a result, even when the caution display is performed in the area 2 when the movable member effect is started, the first stage effect of the movable member effect can be executed, which impairs the playability. Attention can be displayed without. In addition, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being obstructed even if the first stage of the movable member effect is executed. The movable member may be, for example, a shutter member that is provided so as to surround the four sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 and can be covered from each of the four sides, or is above the liquid crystal display 27. It may be an accessory member that is provided in the above and causes the member to drop into the display area of the liquid crystal display 27.

In the game machine in the above embodiment and the modified example, the display or operation of the second and subsequent stages of the dialogue display and the movable member effect is displayed, and after the game in which the first stage display or operation is performed is completed, the next game is performed. An example was described in which the caution display and the dialogue display and the movable member do not overlap by being executed when the start is started. However, the method of preventing the dialogue display and the movable member from overlapping the area for displaying the caution display is not limited to this, and for example, whether or not the caution display is performed by the sub CPU 71 (a predetermined time has not passed). (Whether or not) is judged, and when it is judged that the caution display is displayed, the display or operation of the second and subsequent stages of the dialogue display and the movable member production is regulated / prohibited, and it is judged that the caution display is not performed. It is also possible to allow the display or operation of the second and subsequent stages of the dialogue display and the movable member effect. Further, the execution time of the effect may be set in advance, and in this case, the display or operation of the second and subsequent stages may be set to be executed after the predetermined time has elapsed. Specifically, the display or operation of the first stage can be executed until a predetermined time elapses after the caution display is performed, and the display or operation of the second and subsequent stages is indicated by the caution display. It may be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since it was broken. In addition, although the example in which the dialogue display and the movable member effect are executed over a plurality of games has been described, the display or operation of the second and subsequent stages may be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the caution display. For example, it may be executed and ended within one game.

In the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modified example, as an example of the display mode of the caution display, as shown in FIG. 35 and the like, a display mode in which the message in the caution display is surrounded by a square frame is illustrated. However, the display mode of the caution display is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the caution display may be a mode in which the message in the caution display is surrounded by a square frame and the frame is blinked, or a conspicuous mode in which the message in the caution display is surrounded by a jagged frame. Alternatively, the message image of the caution display may be displayed in the area 2, and the large jagged frame including the message image may be displayed on the entire display area. In this case, the large jagged frame and the message image of the caution display are continuous, and even if the display mode such as the color and shape of the continuous large jagged frame changes according to the degree of advantage. Good. As a result, it is possible to suggest the advantage while paying attention to the caution display. Further, from the viewpoint of ensuring visibility, it is preferable that the color of the caution display is not similar to the color of the background image.

In addition, an example of displaying the caution display layer in the layer having the highest priority among the plurality of layers has been described. However, if the caution display is a layer having a higher priority than the background image layer, it may be displayed in a layer having a lower priority than a layer such as a navigation effect as a specific display or a history display. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being obstructed by the background. Further, in the relationship between the caution display and the specific display, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), since the areas used for the display do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being obstructed by the specific display.

In the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which the background image is an image including only an image according to the gaming state has been described. However, the background image may include an image of caution indication. Further, an example in which the caution display and the suggestion display are displayed using different areas as shown in FIG. 32 has been described. However, the caution display and the suggestion display are not performed at the same time as shown in FIG. 33 and the like. Therefore, the area used for the caution display may be used for the suggestion display. For example, the caution display may be displayed using the area 2, and the suggestion display may also be displayed using the area 2. Even in this case, since the caution display and the suggestion display are not performed at the same time, the caution display is not hindered by the suggestion display, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. In addition, as for the suggestion display, if the suggestion display is not newly started or the display mode of the suggestion display is not changed during the caution display, the caution display is performed in parallel while the suggestion display is continuously performed. It may be one.

Further, in the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which the suggestion display is not performed or is not updated during the caution display has been described by adjusting the execution timing and the layer. However, not limited to this, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the caution display is in progress, allows the suggestion display to be performed or updated when the caution display is not in progress, and allows the suggestion display to be performed or updated when the caution display is not in progress. May be regulated or prohibited from being newly performed or updated.

In the game machine in the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which a caution display is displayed in a predetermined area 2 has been described. However, the caution display is not limited to this as long as it maintains the display position and display mode from the start to the end of the display, and depends on, for example, whether the bonus ends or the AT ends. , The display mode of the caution display may be different.

In the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which the caution display is performed until a predetermined time elapses and then the caution display is terminated has been described. However, the caution display may be continued even after the lapse of a predetermined time until the predetermined notification end condition is satisfied. The predetermined notification end condition is satisfied, for example, by detecting an operation for starting the next game (detecting medal insertion, detecting operation on the bet switch, detecting operation on the start switch, etc.). You may. As a result, the caution display can be continued even after the caution display is performed for a predetermined time, so that the effect of calling attention can be increased.

Further, in the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which the display mode of the caution display does not change from the start to the end of the display has been described. However, the display mode of the caution display may be changed when a predetermined change condition is satisfied. The predetermined change condition may be satisfied by, for example, suggestion display.

In the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which a caution display is displayed using the layer having the highest priority has been described. However, the caution display is not limited to this as long as it is displayed using at least a layer having a higher priority than the background. For example, since the error notification is performed during an error that makes it impossible to advance the game, it may be displayed using a layer having a higher priority than the caution display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being displayed even in a state where the game cannot proceed. When an error notification is performed during the caution display, for example, as described with reference to FIG. 34 (d), the caution display is temporarily stopped during the error notification (timing 8'-10'). , The caution display may be restarted after the error notification is completed. Further, the caution display to be restarted may be displayed with the remaining time up to the predetermined time when the operation is stopped, and the caution display may be performed until the predetermined time (3 seconds) elapses from the restart time. Good. Further, when the error notification is performed, the caution display may be terminated so that the caution display is not performed even after the error notification is completed.

In the game machine in the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example in which the caution display is performed at the end of an advantageous state has been described. However, the caution display is not limited to this, and may be performed by not being controlled in an advantageous state for a predetermined period. Specifically, the caution display may be performed until a predetermined time elapses because the bonus or AT is not controlled even once during the insertion of 500 sheets. Further, the caution display may be performed when displaying a demo screen (also referred to as a customer waiting screen) that is executed when the game is not played for a certain period of time.

In the game machine in the above-described embodiment and modified example, an example of displaying the net increase number in an advantageous state as a history display has been described, but the number of AT games and the number of games added during AT are not limited to this. It may be displayed. Further, although an example of suggesting a set value as a suggestion display has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a suggestion mode.

(D) Modification Example Regarding Addition In the above embodiment, an example in which the addition effect is regulated when YES is determined in SB55 of FIG. 36 has been described. However, even when it is determined as YES in SB55 of FIG. 36, when the number of remaining AT games exceeds the remaining upper limit number of games due to this addition, the remaining upper limit number of games among the number of additional games this time is reached. An additional effect that notifies the number of games until the game is played may be executed. Thereby, the number of AT games can be notified to the player within the range of the upper limit number of times in the advantageous period.

In addition, an example has been described in which the additional effect in the above embodiment is an effect of notifying the number of additional games specified by the number of additional games command. However, the additional effect is not limited to this, and may notify the number of games equal to or less than the number of additional games specified by the number of additional games command. For example, when the number of additional games specified from the number of additional games command is "100", the sub CPU 71 does not execute the additional effect, "10 game GET!", "20 game GET!", "50 game GET". It may be decided to be one of "!" And "100 game GET!", And the additional effect may be controlled based on the decision result. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the number of games may actually be added to the number of games notified by the additional effect.

In this configuration, the sub CPU 71 has already been notified to the player by an additional effect or the like even when the number of remaining AT games is equal to or greater than the remaining upper limit number of games, for example. When the number of remaining AT games does not exceed the number of remaining upper limit games, the additional effect may be executed.

The slot machine 1 in the above embodiment has, as information for specifying the upper limit, the remaining upper limit game number command that can specify the remaining upper limit game number up to the upper limit number of times in the advantageous period, and the remaining AT game number that can specify the remaining AT game number. An example of outputting a command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 has been described. However, the information for specifying the upper limit is not limited to that composed of a plurality of commands, and may be composed of, for example, the remaining upper limit games and the remaining AT games by one command.

In the above embodiment, AT is exemplified as an advantageous state, and an advantageous period is exemplified as a period in which the advantageous state can be controlled. However, the favorable state and the period during which the favorable state can be controlled are not limited to this. For example, the advantageous state is an RT in which the winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than that in the normal state (a state in which the degree of advantage is similar to that of the advantageous RT in the above embodiment), and the RT can be controlled during the advantageous state. It is possible to control the winning combination (for example, a role such as promotion replay) that triggers the control to a state that can be controlled to be the target of the internal lottery (for example, a state such as normal RT that can win the promotion replay). Period).

Further, the example in which the advantageous state control period controlled to the advantageous state is a period in which the number of AT games determined in the AT lottery and the additional lottery is consumed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of medals are paid out. It may be a period until the number of medals paid out minus the medals used for setting the number of bets reaches a predetermined number, which is for players such as AT games. It may be a period until a predetermined number of advantageous games are played. Further, although the example in which the upper limit value of the advantageous state controllable period is the number of games (1500 times) or the cumulative number (2400 cards) has been described, the limit is not limited to this, for example, the number of medals paid out (3000 cards). It may be the number of games (1000 times) that is advantageous for the player such as AT games.

The example in which the main CPU 61 in the above embodiment executes the additional lottery process regardless of whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games is reached by the time the remaining number of AT games is consumed has been described. However, the main CPU 61 has a normal mode in which the additional lottery is won with a predetermined probability and a high probability mode in which the additional lottery is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability (a state in which the additional lottery is executed in a more advantageous manner than the normal mode). Both can be controlled, and when the additional lottery is performed according to the controlled mode, the mode is set regardless of whether or not the remaining maximum number of games is reached by the time the remaining AT games are consumed. In addition to being controlled, an additional lottery may be performed according to the controlled mode. Specifically, regarding the process of controlling the mode and the process of performing an additional lottery according to the mode, when the number of remaining AT games is consumed but the remaining maximum number of games is not reached, and the number of remaining AT games It may be executed in the same manner as in the situation where the maximum number of remaining games is reached by the time the game is consumed. As a result, the processing load and storage capacity on the main CPU 61 side are increased because there is no processing step for determining whether or not the maximum number of remaining AT games is reached before the remaining number of AT games is consumed. It is possible to improve the fun of the game by mode control without making it.

On the other hand, in the case of displaying the background image according to the controlled mode (for example, the daytime background image is displayed in the normal mode and the evening background image is displayed in the high probability mode), the control is as follows. You may try to do it. For example, when the number of remaining AT games is not reached before the number of remaining AT games is consumed, the background image is switched according to the controlled mode, whereas the number of remaining AT games is consumed. When the number of remaining upper limit games is reached by the time, the background image may not be changed (for example, the special background is maintained) depending on the mode change.

Further, whether or not the main CPU 61 reaches the remaining maximum number of games by the time the remaining number of AT games is consumed, at least between the time when the bonus is won during AT and the time when the bonus is won. Regardless of this, the additional lottery process may not be executed. As a result, the player can pay attention to the winning bonus without increasing the processing load on the main CPU 61 side.

Further, the main CPU 61 wins a bonus (such as "RBB" in the above embodiment) in which the winning probability in the internal lottery is set to the same probability (no setting difference) regardless of the set value, and is controlled by the bonus. In this case, the additional lottery process may be executed even during the bonus regardless of whether or not the maximum number of remaining AT games is reached by the time the remaining number of AT games is consumed. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 wins a bonus in which the winning probability in the internal lottery is set to a different probability (with a setting difference) according to the set value and is controlled by the bonus, the remaining AT games are consumed. Regardless of whether or not the maximum number of remaining games is reached by the time the bonus is played, the additional lottery process may not be executed during the bonus.

As shown in FIG. 36, whether the sub CPU 71 in the above embodiment executes the additional effect depending on whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games is reached by the time the remaining number of AT games is consumed. An example of controlling whether to execute a special background has been described. However, the sub CPU 71 may control a predetermined effect depending on whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games is reached by the time the remaining number of AT games is consumed, and the number of remaining AT games may be determined. The execution ratio of a predetermined effect (including an additional effect) may be different depending on whether or not the maximum number of remaining games is reached by the time the game is consumed. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing a set value suggestion effect that suggests a set value to a player, the sub CPU 71 is not in a situation where the remaining upper limit number of games is reached by the time the remaining AT games are consumed. The set value suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate when the number of remaining upper limit games is reached by the time the remaining number of AT games is consumed than when. As a result, when the number of remaining AT games is reached before the remaining number of AT games is consumed, the set value suggestion effect is easily executed, so that the number of additional games added internally is deleted. It can be complemented. Further, when the end telop display is displayed and the AT is terminated, or when a special end screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the end telop display is not displayed and the AT is terminated, or when the AT is terminated in FIG. As in h), it is easier to execute the set value suggestion effect than in the case of the normal end screen, or the more advantageous set value suggestion effect (the suggestion effect of setting value 5 or 6 is confirmed is set value 2 or more. It can be said that it is more advantageous than the suggestion effect), and it may be easier to execute. Further, the sub CPU 71 may control a predetermined effect regardless of whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games is reached by the time the remaining number of AT games is consumed.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command are output from the main CPU 61 when one game is completed has been described. However, the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command are not limited to those that are output at a predetermined timing in one game, and for example, the start switch 19 is operated to operate the reel. It may be output at the timing when the rotation is started.

(Other)
In the above embodiment, the determination switch 81a, the left selection switch 81b, the right selection switch 81c, the upper selection switch 81d, and the lower selection switch 81e are used as operation means for accepting operations in the administrator menu state and the player menu state. The effect operation unit 81 provided is illustrated. However, the operation means for receiving the operation in the administrator menu state and the player menu state is not limited to this, and may be composed of two switches (a decision switch and a selection switch). Further, the operating means (for example, start switch 19, stop switches 21L to 21R, etc.) used in the progress of the game may also be used.

Further, on the administrator menu screen or the player menu screen, a guidance display may be displayed to guide the administrator or the player as to which switch (operation means) should be operated. FIG. 56A is a diagram showing an example in which guidance is displayed at the lower left of the administrator menu screen. FIG. 56B is a diagram showing an example in which the guidance display is performed at the lower left of the player menu screen. As the guidance display, as shown in each of FIGS. 56A and 56B, it is preferable that an image imitating the effect operation unit 81 (hereinafter, referred to as an operation unit simulated image) is displayed. Further, which switch of the effect operation unit 81 is the determination operation and which switch is the selection operation may be guided or highlighted by highlighting. By doing so, it is possible to inform the administrator or the player which switch should be operated, and it is possible to prevent the unnecessary switch from being operated. Further, the operation unit simulated image may be a common or similar image on both the administrator menu screen and the player menu screen. By using the same or similar images in this way, the processing load and the amount of data can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent players and managers from misunderstanding that different production operation units may exist. it can.

In the above embodiment, when it is determined that an error has occurred in the error determination process on the sub CPU 71 side, the error notification is sent regardless of whether the administrator menu screen or the player menu screen is displayed. An example of priority has been described. However, during the inspection mode for verifying the operation check of the effect device driven and controlled by the sub CPU 71, the error notification is performed even when it is determined that an error has occurred in the error determination process on the sub CPU 71 side. Instead, the display in the inspection mode may be continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inspection from being hindered by the error notification.

In the above embodiment, "navi voice", "costume", "wallpaper" and the like are exemplified as game items. However, the game items are not limited to these, and in addition to or in addition to these, for example, "volume adjustment" for adjusting the volume, "BGM selection" for selecting BGM, winning history or winning history of RBB and small wins. The "game history" or the like for displaying the background music may be defined, and any item may be used as long as it can be confirmed or set by the player.

"Production customization" among the game items in the above embodiment has described an example in which various settings can be made via the player menu screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and specific items among the customizable items are the games. It may be possible to change and set without going through the person menu screen. For example, among the customizable items, the "wallpaper" item or the like can be operated by operating the left selection switch 81b and the right selection switch 81c while waiting for the game, or by selecting the upper selection switch 81d and the lower selection without going through the player menu screen. It may be changed and set by operating the switch 81e. FIG. 56 (c) is a diagram showing the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 during the game standby, and FIG. 56 (d) is the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 when the wallpaper is changed and set during the game standby. It is a figure which shows. When the game is on standby (when a predetermined time has elapsed since the game was on standby), as shown in FIG. 56 (c), as described with reference to FIG. 56 (a) and the like, the operation unit is simulated as a guidance display. The image is displayed and a message such as "Change wallpaper with the left and right buttons" is displayed. It is easier for the player to understand that the operation buttons used for customizing the effect during the game standby are switches between the other directions that are paired with one direction such as left and right. The buttons are not limited to the left and right buttons, and may be up and down buttons. In addition, when the guidance display is performed, it is better to output a sound that can be identified as changeable (hereinafter, changeable effect) such as "wallpaper can be changed" as shown by a balloon in FIG. 56 (c). preferable. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the wallpaper can be changed by operating the left and right buttons.

When the left and right buttons are operated, the wallpaper image is changed and set as shown in FIG. 56 (d). The diagonal line in FIG. 56 (d) indicates that the image is different from the wallpaper in FIG. 56 (c). In addition, when the switch is operated to change various wallpapers, a sound that can identify the change, such as "The wallpaper has been changed" as shown by a balloon in FIG. 56 (d) (hereinafter, change specific effect). ) Is output. As a result, the player can recognize that the change operation, which is an operation for changing the wallpaper, is reflected. Further, the change specific effect may be performed each time the change operation is performed, but the change is not limited to this, and further change operations may be performed within the period from the one change operation to the elapse of a certain time. Even if it is done, the change specific effect may not be performed, the change specific effect may be performed again by the change operation after a certain period of time, and the change specific effect may not be performed even if the change operation is performed before the certain time elapses. .. As a result, it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness that the change specific operation is output every time the change operation is performed. It should be noted that a specific item may be customizable by operating a predetermined button such as a left or right button as long as the game is waiting, even when the guidance display is not displayed. ..

In the above-described embodiment and modified example, the period during which the AT as an advantageous state can be controlled is the period during which the number of AT games determined in the AT lottery and the additional lottery is consumed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a period until a predetermined number of medals are paid out, or a period until the net increase number obtained by subtracting the medals used for setting the number of bets from the paid out medals reaches a predetermined number of medals. , AT game and other games that are advantageous to the player may be performed for a predetermined number of times.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command are output from the main CPU 61 when one game is completed has been described. However, the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command are not limited to those that are output at a predetermined timing in one game, and for example, the start switch 19 is operated to operate the reel. It may be output at the timing when the rotation is started.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned on when the AT winning notification is performed has been described. However, the start of lighting of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is not limited to this as long as it is at a predetermined timing during the advantageous period, and is controlled, for example, when CZ is started or in a section where the so-called ball output rate is 1 or more. The timing to be played, the AT in the advantageous period, the timing when the so-called ball ejection rate is controlled in the section of 1 or more and the first navigation effect is executed, the AT in the advantageous period, the so-called ball ejection rate is 1 or more It may be the timing when the first navigation effect is executed under the control of the section and medals larger than the number of bets are awarded.

In the above embodiment, as the predetermined advantageous period transition condition, the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, and the predetermined AT transition lottery condition, for example, a condition established by winning a "one-card combination" or a "bonus 1" or "bonus 2" winning. For example, the conditions for shifting to the advantageous period are the condition for winning the "one-card combination" and the condition for winning the "bonus 1" or "bonus 2", and the CZ transition lottery. In addition to these conditions and AT transition lottery conditions, there are conditions that are established by winning the "normal lip" and conditions that are established by winning any of "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4". May be good. In this case, under the conditions that are established by winning the "normal lip" or by winning any of "left correct answer bell 1" to "right correct answer bell 4", the conditions that are established by winning the "one-card combination" and " You may decide to control CZ or AT with a lower probability than the probability of determining to control CZ or AT by winning "Bonus 1" or "Bonus 2".

In the above embodiment, AT is exemplified as an advantageous state, and an advantageous period is exemplified as a period in which the advantageous state can be controlled. However, the favorable state and the period during which the favorable state can be controlled are not limited to this. For example, the advantageous state may be an additional specialization period in which the probability that the number of AT games is added is improved, and the bonus state and the RT in which the winning probability of the replaying combination is improved as compared with the normal state (the above-mentioned implementation). The winning combination (for example, a role such as promotion replay) that triggers control of the RT is subject to the internal lottery during the period when the advantage RT and the degree of advantage in the form are the same) and the advantageous state can be controlled. It may be a period that can be controlled to a state (for example, a period that can be controlled to a state such as a normal RT that can win a promotion replay).

In the above-described embodiment and the modified example, the push order bell is exemplified as the winning combination group to be notified of the advantageous operation mode notification image (navigation effect). However, the target of the advantageous operation mode notification image is not limited to this, and is, for example, a winning combination group including an advantageous replaying combination that can be controlled to an advantageous RT having a high replay winning probability, and the advantageous replaying combination can be obtained. It may be intended for a plurality of types of winning combination groups (so-called push order replays) having different operation modes (push order) for winning a prize. Further, the target of the advantageous operation mode notification image is, for example, a winning combination group including a disadvantageous replaying combination that can be controlled by a disadvantaged RT having a low replay winning probability, and an operation for avoiding winning of the disadvantageous replaying combination. It may be intended for a plurality of types of winning combination groups (so-called push order replays) having different modes (push order).

In the above embodiment, an example in which the variable display unit 13 includes three left variable display rows 10L to a right variable display row 10R will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even a gaming machine having one variable display row may be used. It may be a gaming machine having four or more variable display rows. Further, although the variable display unit 13 is configured by the reels 11L to 11R, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display unit 13 may be configured by a display device such as a liquid crystal display or a 7-segment LED. Further, although an example in which only one winning line is set for the variable display unit 13 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of winning lines may be set.

Further, the gaming machine as a slot machine in the above-described embodiment and modified example may have the following configuration.

Preferably, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of symbols can be variably displayed by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, and the game value can be given according to the symbols when the variable display is stopped. An advantageous state control means that controls an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and a game value that is set as a bet number from the given game value between the time when the advantageous state is controlled and the time when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The net increase number display means includes a net increase number calculation means for calculating the net increase number obtained by subtracting the above, and a net increase number display means for displaying the net increase number calculated by the net increase number calculation means in the advantageous state, and the net increase number display means is the net increase. The net increase is displayed in a predetermined display mode until the number reaches a specific number, and when the net increase reaches the specific number, the net increase is displayed in a special display mode different from the predetermined display mode. After that, even when the net increase number becomes less than the specific number, the display in the special display mode is maintained.

According to this configuration, the net increase is displayed in the predetermined display mode until the calculated net increase reaches a specific number between the time when the advantageous state is controlled and the time when the predetermined end condition is satisfied. , When the net increase reaches a specific number, the net increase is displayed in a special display mode different from the predetermined display mode, and even when the net increase becomes less than the specific number after that, the display in the special display mode is maintained. Will be done. As a result, after the net increase reaches the specific number, it is displayed in the special display mode regardless of whether the net increase is less than the specific number. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the specific number has been reached depending on whether or not the net increase number is displayed in the special display mode, and it is assumed that the player overlooks the notification that the net increase number has reached the specific number. However, since the net increase number is displayed in the special display mode, it is possible to grasp that the game machine is operating normally, and it is possible to prevent the game machine from being distrusted.

Preferably, the special state control means for controlling the special state different from the advantageous state and advantageous for the player is provided, and the net increase calculation means is controlled until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. The net increase is continuously calculated even in the special state, the net increase display means displays the net increase even in the special state, and the net increase reaches the specific number in the special state. Occasionally, the net increase is displayed in the special display mode different from the predetermined display mode, and even when the net increase is less than the specific number after that, the display in the special display mode is maintained. To do.

According to this configuration, the net increase is continuously calculated even during the special state, and the net increase is displayed in the special display mode even when the net increase reaches a specific number, and the net increase is displayed thereafter. Even when the number becomes less than a specific number, the display in the special display mode is maintained. As a result, the advantageous state and the special state can be related in terms of calculating and displaying the net increase, the interest of the game can be improved, and the special state different from the advantageous state is controlled. However, it is possible to grasp whether or not a specific number has been reached by whether or not the net increase number is displayed in the special display mode, and the game machine is operating normally because the net increase number is displayed in the special display mode. It is possible to grasp this and prevent the game machine from being distrustful.

Preferably, the special state control means can control the special state during the special allowable period in which control to the special state is allowed, and the gaming machine is said to be in the special allowable period. A special permissible effect executing means for executing a special permissible effect indicating that it is in the special permissible period is provided, and the net increase calculation means is the net increase even during the special permissible period until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Is continuously calculated, and the net increase display means interrupts the display of the net increase from the execution of the special allowable effect until it is controlled to the special state, and when it is controlled to the special state. When the net increase reaches the specific number between the time when the display of the net increase is restarted and the special allowable effect is executed and the time when the net increase is controlled to the special state, the net increase is controlled to the special state and then the net increase. The number is displayed in the predetermined display mode, and then the net increase is displayed in the special display mode when the game value is given.

According to this configuration, the net increase is continuously calculated even during the special allowance period, while the display of the net increase is interrupted from the execution of the special allowance effect to the control to the special state. As a result, the player can concentrate on being controlled to the special state when the special allowable effect is being executed. In addition, when the net increase reaches a specific number from the execution of the special allowable effect to the control to the special state, after the net increase is displayed in the predetermined display mode after the control to the special state, the game The net increase is displayed in a special display mode when the value is given. As a result, the net increase is not suddenly displayed in the special display mode at the moment when the special state is controlled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that a special effect has been performed, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may confuse the player.

Preferably, the special state control means can control the special state during the special allowable period in which control to the special state is permitted, and the gaming machine is subject to the special allowable period. When the special permissible effect executing means for executing the special permissible effect that the special permissible period is in progress and the net increase number reaches any of a plurality of predetermined stages, the number of stages is reached. The arrival effect display means for displaying the arrival effect is provided, and the net increase calculation means continuously calculates the net increase even during the special allowable period until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the net increase is continuously calculated. Even when the net increase number reaches any of the plurality of defined steps, the effect display means is used from the execution of the special allowable effect to the control of the special state. The arrival effect is not displayed, and the arrival effect is displayed when the game value is given after being controlled to the special state.

According to this configuration, the net increase is continuously calculated even during the special allowance period, but even when the net increase reaches any of a plurality of defined stages, the special allowance effect is executed. The arrival effect is not displayed during the period from the time when the game is controlled to the special state, and the arrival effect is displayed after the game value is given after the control to the special state. As a result, the player can concentrate on being controlled to the special state when the special allowable effect is being executed, and the arrival effect is not suddenly displayed at the moment when the special state is controlled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that a special effect has been performed, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may confuse the player.

Preferably, in a gaming machine provided with a display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols and capable of giving a privilege according to the symbols when the variable display is stopped, a display area in which a plurality of layers capable of displaying an image are superimposed. The image display means is provided with an image display means capable of displaying the image, and the image display means displays a predetermined image in a predetermined layer among the plurality of layers with the end of an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the predetermined layer is the predetermined layer. When displaying an image, a caution image that alerts the player to excessive attention to the game in a layer having a higher priority than the predetermined layer is displayed until at least a predetermined time has elapsed, and a specific condition regarding the game is satisfied. The specific image is displayed in the display area that does not overlap with the area in which the caution image is displayed even until the predetermined time elapses when the specific condition is satisfied. It is an image to be made.

According to this configuration, the caution image is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the predetermined layer on which the predetermined image is displayed until at least a predetermined time elapses. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the attention image from being obstructed by the predetermined image. Further, when the specific image is displayed even until the predetermined time for displaying the caution image elapses, the specific image is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the area where the caution image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific image while preventing the attention image from being obstructed by the specific image. As a result, while the caution image is displayed, the player can visually recognize the caution image, so that the function of calling attention can be fully exerted, and at least the information regarding the fact that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific image is provided in the game. It is possible to reliably notify a person or a clerk of a game hall.

Preferably, the gaming machine includes an advantageous state control means for controlling the advantageous state, the specific condition includes a condition that is satisfied when the advantageous state ends, and the specific image is a game in the advantageous state. Includes a history broadcast image that broadcasts information about the history.

According to this configuration, since the player can visually recognize the history notification image even when the caution image is displayed, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the information regarding the game history.

Preferably, the gaming machine includes an abnormality determining means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, and the specific condition is satisfied by determining that an abnormality has occurred by the abnormality determining means. The specific image includes an abnormality notification image for notifying that an abnormality has occurred.

According to this configuration, since the player can visually recognize the abnormality notification image even when the caution image is displayed, it is possible to reliably notify that an abnormality has occurred.

Preferably, the gaming machine includes a stop operation means for stopping the variable display and a combination lottery means for determining which combination of the plurality of combinations has been won, and the specific conditions are the same. The specific image includes a condition that is satisfied when the lottery result of the combination lottery becomes a specific lottery result in which the advantage for the player differs depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, and the specific image has a high advantage for the player. Includes an advantageous operation mode notification image that identifiablely notifies the advantageous operation mode.

According to this configuration, since the player can visually recognize the advantageous operation mode notification image even when the caution image is displayed, the advantageous operation mode can be reliably notified to the player.

Preferably, the gaming machine includes effect control means for controlling execution of a plurality of types of effects including an update effect that updates the effect image in a plurality of stages, and the specific condition is that the update effect is executed. The specific image includes the condition to be satisfied, and the specific image includes the effect image updated by a predetermined stage among the effect images updated in the update effect, and the effect image updated in the update effect after the predetermined stage. The effect image updated to is an image displayed in an area that overlaps with an area in which the caution image can be displayed.

According to this configuration, even when the caution image is displayed, the player can visually recognize the effect image updated by a predetermined stage in the update effect, so that the caution image is displayed without impairing the playability. be able to.

Preferably, after the image display means displays the image of the predetermined mode as the caution image, the display mode of the caution image is displayed until at least the predetermined time elapses regardless of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. Maintain the predetermined mode.

According to this configuration, the display mode of the caution image can be maintained in a predetermined mode from the start to the end of the display of the caution image. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the caution image from being overlooked as compared with an image in which the display mode changes (movement of the display position, etc.) in the middle.

Preferably, the game machine includes a game operation receiving means for receiving a game operation for advancing the game, and the image display means receives the game operation when the caution image is displayed. Even if it does, the display of the caution image is maintained at least until the predetermined period elapses.

According to this configuration, even if the game operation is accepted while the caution image is displayed, the display of the caution image is maintained until at least a predetermined time elapses. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the caution image from being overlooked as compared with the case where the display of the caution image is changed (movement of the display position, etc.) due to the acceptance of the game operation.

Preferably, the image display means can display a special image different from the predetermined image in a predetermined layer among the plurality of layers, and even when displaying the special image, the priority is higher than the predetermined layer. The caution image is displayed on the layer having a high value until at least the predetermined time has elapsed.

According to this configuration, even if a special image different from the predetermined image is displayed, the caution image is displayed in the layer having a higher priority than the predetermined layer until at least a predetermined time elapses. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the attention image from being obstructed by the special image.

Preferably, in a gaming machine provided with a display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols and capable of giving a privilege according to a display result when the variable display is stopped, the progress of the game is controlled and the progress of the game is adjusted. A game control means for outputting information and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on the information are provided, and the game control means determines an advantageous state control period, which is a period in which the player is controlled in an advantageous state. When the advantageous state control period determining means and the end condition at which the determined advantageous state control period ends are satisfied, or when a special end condition different from the end condition is satisfied before the end condition is satisfied. The special termination condition includes the advantageous state control means for terminating the advantageous state, and the advantageous state controllable period, which is a period in which the advantageous state can be controlled, reaches an upper limit value, and the advantageous state control period The determining means can execute the additional control for adding the advantageous state control period when the predetermined additional condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, and the special end condition is satisfied by the time the advantageous state control period is consumed. When the predetermined additional condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the above condition is satisfied, the additional control is executed, and the advantageous state control means is consumed by satisfying the special end condition and terminating the advantageous state. Regardless of the residual advantageous state control period that did not exist, the residual advantageous state control period is initialized.

According to this configuration, the game control means side executes the additional control when the predetermined additional condition is satisfied, regardless of whether or not the special end condition is satisfied before the advantageous state control period is consumed. .. Further, when the special termination condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is terminated, the residual advantageous state control period is initialized regardless of the residual advantageous state control period that has not been consumed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gambling in the advantageous state from becoming too high without increasing the processing load and the storage capacity on the game control means side.

Preferably, the game control means includes information for specifying the upper limit, which is information for making it possible to specify whether or not the special end condition is satisfied by the time the advantageous state control period is consumed, and the above-mentioned information for specifying the upper limit. The effect control means includes a specific information output means for outputting a plurality of types of specific information including an additional specific information for making it possible to specify that the additional control has been executed in an advantageous state. The additional effect control means that can execute the additional effect for notifying that the additional control has been executed when the additional specific information is received in the advantageous state is included, and the additional effect control means includes the advantageous state control period. When it is specified based on the upper limit arrival identification information that the special end condition is satisfied by the time the above is consumed and the addition identification information is received, the execution of the addition effect is restricted.

According to this configuration, the effect control means executes the additional effect when it receives the additional specific information from the game control means side, while the special end condition is satisfied by the time the advantageous state control period is consumed. Is specified based on the information for specifying the upper limit, the execution of the additional effect is restricted. That is, when the period controlled in the advantageous state is actually extended, the additional effect is executed, and when the period controlled in the advantageous state is not actually extended, the additional effect is regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the special end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends even though the advantageous state control period notified by the additional effect has not passed.

Preferably, the information for specifying the upper limit is information that can specify the remaining upper limit period until the advantageous state controllable period reaches the upper limit value and the remaining control period until the advantageous state control period is consumed. The specific information output means outputs information that can specify the remaining upper limit period and the remaining control period in the game for each game as the upper limit arrival identification information, and the remaining control period is the same. When the addition control is executed in the game that outputs the upper limit arrival identification information, the addition period is included.

According to this configuration, the remaining control period specified from the upper limit arrival identification information output for each game includes the additional period when the additional control is executed in the game. As a result, the effect control means can determine whether or not the special end condition is satisfied by the time the advantageous state control period is consumed, including the added period, so that the presence or absence of the added effect can be determined more accurately. Can be decided.

Preferably, the special state control means for controlling the special state which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player is provided, and the advantageous state is controlled during the special state controlled by the end of the advantageous state. The control period is not elapsed, while the advantageous state controllable period is elapsed.

According to this configuration, even if the special state is controlled by the end of the advantageous state, the period of being controlled to the advantageous state is shortened by being controlled by the special state, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the advantageous state controllable period is not substantially extended, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Preferably, it is a gaming machine capable of playing a game and giving a privilege according to the result of the game, and has a first menu state capable of displaying a game item for a player in a display area and an administrator. A management item for controlling the display area to one of a plurality of types including a second menu state that can be displayed in the display area, and at least an effect control means that controls the display area according to the state. The effect control means includes an operation means for receiving an operation in each of the first menu state and the second menu state, and the effect control means is when a predetermined time elapses without the operation means being operated in the first menu state. The display in the first menu state is terminated, and the display in the second menu state is terminated when a specific time shorter than the predetermined time elapses without operating the operating means in the second menu state. ..

According to such a configuration, when the operating means does not accept the operation in the second menu state, the timing for ending the display of the second menu state is when the operating means does not accept the operation in the first menu state. It is earlier than the timing to end the display of the first menu state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will see the second menu state in which the management item can be displayed as compared with the first menu state. On the contrary, even when the operating means does not accept the operation, the display in the first menu state can be displayed longer than the display in the second menu state. Therefore, the game items can be confirmed at the player's pace with a relatively large margin. That is, while it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player can see the second menu state in which the management item can be displayed, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the display in the first menu state can be confirmed with a margin. ..

1-slot machine, 11L, 11M, 11R reel, 14L, 14M, 14R reel motor, 21L, 21M, 21R stop switch, 27 liquid crystal display, 63 main control board, 73 sub control board.

Claims (1)

In a game machine that can play
An advantageous state control means that enables control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, up to the time when a predetermined limiter value is reached.
A specific image display means for displaying a specific image capable of reaching the limiter value and specifying that the advantageous state ends when a specific condition is satisfied according to the progress of the game in the advantageous state is provided. ,
The limiter value includes a first limiter value based on the game value given in the advantageous state and a second limiter value based on the number of games digested in the advantageous state.
The specific condition includes a first specific condition that is established based on the given game value and a second specific condition that is established based on the number of digested games.
The specific image differs between when the first specific condition is satisfied and when the second specific condition is satisfied.
Further, the gaming machine displays a caution image that warns the player to pay attention to excessive gaming when the advantageous state is ended, and a timing at which the specific image is displayed when the limiter value is reached and the game is terminated. A game machine that displays the caution image at a different timing than.